Home

the PDF here. - Taming Apache OpenOffice

1. pen on page 1 Ee Zoom factor 10 13 m a Page layout Default Single page Continuous Continuous facing Figure 253 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog Window options _ Center window on screen L_ Open in full screen mode Display document title User interface options _ Hide menubar C Hide toolbar Hide window controls Transitions All bookmark levels Visible bookmark levels Figure 254 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 245 User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar e Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar e Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On the Links page you can choose how links are exported to PDF General Initial View User Interface Links Security _ Convert document references to PDF targets _ Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet b
2. s nsssensensrrrnserersrrsrrrrsrrrrrnrsrrrrrnrrrrnrerrrrorrrrrrrererrerrsrne 10 What are the advantages of Apache OpenOffice s nenessernsrerrerrsrrrrsrrrrnrrrrerrnrerrnrrererrerrene 11 What you see may De diforeniscrrecscismcsniiscireianin eron ER Ee 11 Using Apache Openoffice on a MaC seen ne eee no oe narra EAEN 12 Fieguenty asked UNS crrcsrrerenasi reran vinceecesnesenciaureecisuw esata icuecheensiwasasersixeaurescceuns 12 What are all these things Called cccccceccsscssecseeceeesseceeceeecseeeeeesesseeeeesseeeeeteeseaeceseeenseseeenaes 13 ACKNOW O Sa rraecsacivsse an SE E ESEO ies 14 Chapter 1 introducing Apache Open fiiC E ssricissiirsniisii a aasa 15 What is Apache OpenOPfiCe ccccccceccsccseecceeceeeceeeceeeceueceeseesaeesaeesaeesaeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeesenens 15 KDI TEGU E T EEEE E E E E ENER 16 HOw io geland metalthe SOWA O neenenngiiere ieii ET EEE ETE Ea 16 Extensions and es 6 06 cone ee ee nee rene Tenner er ene eee eee ee AENEAN ANENE 16 Starting Apache OGGNO MICE oc ccdicainccnaindcnissanatocecdabssedatertadcinueipivoliianieddegecpsnduocmearsecenehedsecosedlunndenndars 17 Parts re Malh Ny sreeea st oee crept ternternateecrenss EAEE AEEA A EEEE 18 alarina a Dew GS i eena r ENEN AR 23 Opening an SSN docume essersi an RT E E i 23 SERENS 2e t01 Meee nen EA EEE E A E N EE P EEE EE E ENEE AIEEE E 24 Sea Ka e TE g Re eee A E E E E T E AE E E A E E E eee ee 25 Closing Apache OPeNOPPICE
3. 274 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started If you prefer selected material to appear in reversed color typically white text on a black background deselect this option Print options On the OpenOffice org Print page set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours If your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top Tip bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Reduce print data Settings for Printer Print to file Printer Reduce transparency Reduce gradients Automatically Gradient stripes 64 No transparency Intermediate color C Reduce bitmaps Convert colors to grayscale High print quality Normal print quality Resolution Include transparent objects Printer warnings Paper size Transparency Paper orientation Figure 284 Choosing general printing options to apply to all AOO components Path options On the OpenOffice org
4. Figure 149 Rotating an object Inclination and perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted basic shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays fixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging As with rotation you can set the inclination slanting to occur in steps of 15 by pressing the Shift key while moving the handle Editing objects To change an object s attributes such as color and border width you can use the Line and Filling toolbar or the context menu If the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 150 is not visible you can display it using View gt Toolbars gt Line and Filling From here you can edit the most common object attributes You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line icon and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area A icon to see more options ME coor levee r 7 3 4 9 6 f G 9 10 1 Styles and Formatting 4 Line Style 7 Area 2 Line 5 Line Width 8 9 Area Style Filling 3 Arrow Style 6 Line Color 10 Shadow Figure 150 Line and Filling toolbar 164 Taming Apache
5. SPayment Text VARCHAR payment type SnackNo Number NUMERIC SnackCost Number NUMERIC SnPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for snacks Miscellaneous Number NUMERIC misc costs MPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for motel MiscNotes Memo LONGVARCHA MiscPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for miscellaneous Figure 162 Fields in Vacations table Creating tables for the list box When the same information can be used in several fields design a table for each type of information Each table will contain two fields the information field and D in that order Caution A You must create these tables with the information field listed first and the ID field listed last Failure to do so will produce the wrong results For my Payment table I use Name and ID as my fields with Dan Kevin and Cash being the Name entries The corresponding ID entries are O 1 2 When the Name field is listed first in the table one of the three names will appear in the payment field of the Fuel table If the ID field is listed first O 1 or 2 appear in the payment field instead 1 Follow the directions in Creating tables in Design View on page 179 In the table the two fields can be Type and PaymentiD In the Field Properties set AutoValue to Yes for the PaymentID field Set the PaymentiD field as the primary key See Figure 163 2 Save the table using the name Payment Type Note
6. Wwendor Version Features Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 71 Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_18 Parameters Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_07 Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 0em Class Path a Mm t Location C Program Files Java jre6 Figure 293 Choosing a Java runtime environment Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 281 Online Update options On the OpenOffice org Online Update page you can choose whether and how often to have AOO check the AOO website for program updates If the Check for updates automatically option is selected an icon appears at the right hand end of the menu bar when an update is available Click this icon to open a dialog where you can choose to download the update Online Update Options Ei Check for updates automatically Every Day Every Week i Eve ry Month Last checked 08 25 10 05 27 00 PM Download updates automatically Download destination CA Users Jared Desktop Figure 294 Configuring Online Update If the Download updates automatically option is selected the download starts when you click the icon To change the download destination click the Change button and select the required folder in the file browser window Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools gt Options Click the expansion sym
7. Agenda H Save As Ctrl Shift S j Presentation Cow Al i Save All ian Page od omen Document Converter Versions Euro Converter Export S Export as PDF Address Data Source Figure 28 Creating a template using a wizard Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note You can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Edit A standard file browser window opens 2 Select the template that you want to edit 3 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File gt Save from the main menu Updating a document from a changed template The next time you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears The template 00o03_chapter_ template on which this document is based has been modified Do you want to update style based formattings according to the modified template Update Styles Keep Old Styles Figure 29 Update styles message Click Update Styles to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click Keep Old Styles if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document but see Caution notice below 42 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Starte
8. lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design Both ntroducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy can also be Note used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 114 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen You can change the page format at any time The Screen page is optimized for a 4 3 display 28cm x 21cm so it is not Note suitable for modern widescreen displays You can change the slide size at any time switching to Normal view and selecting Format gt Page 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Figure 116 e Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu Select the desired speed for the transition between the different slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now 6 Click Create A new presentation is created Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 129 x Presentation Wizard Select a slide transition Effect a speed Select the presentation type Default Automatic Duration of page 00 00 10 Duration of pause 00 00 10 W Preview Show logo Figure 116 Sele
9. 3 Calculate fuel economy Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity in the next column to the right of the word Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity j 0 Figure 211 Fuel economy calculation field When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or Note multiple word names table or query use double quotes around the table or query name The query will then add the rest of the double quotes as in Figure 211 Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Query toolbar Figure 204 The results are in Figure 212 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 211 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FiuellD Fuel FuellD Distance End Reading Odometer Fuer Odometer End Reading P78 704 2 1 M45 11 19 570 1032 3 TTB 1 293 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 212 Result of running the fuel economy query Notice that not all of the last column label is v
10. Arial a m Font settings for HTML Basic and SQL sources Fonts Automatic W Non proportional fonts only Size 10 Figure 288 Defining a font to be substituted for another font On the OpenOffice org Fonts page 1 Select the Apply Replacement Table option 2 3 4 5 Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in In the Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen In the bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Security options Use the OpenOffice org Security page Figure 289 to choose security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove it or you can have AOO remove some of it automatically Note that
11. Cross platform Apache OpenOffice runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X and Linux Extensive language support The user interface for Apache OpenOffice is available in several languages and more are being added Apache OpenOffice also supports bi directional text and complex text layout for many scripts Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master Integration The components of Apache OpenOffice are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling checker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw You do not need to know which application was used to create a particular file For example you can open a Draw file from Writer Granularity Usually if you change an option it affects all components However Apache OpenOffice options can be set at a component level or even document level File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats Apache OpenOffice includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 1 2 3 formats An extension provides the ability to import and ed
12. Figure 260 Selecting an address list 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create salutation page deselect This document should contain a salutation 250 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Mail Merge Wizard Steps Create a salutation 1 Select starting doce peta contain a salutation 2 Select document type 3 Select address list Dear Mrs lt Last Mame Dear Mr Last Name 6 Edit document Gender 7 Personalize document 5 Save print or send Figure 261 Deselecting a salutation 5 Inthe left hand list click 8 Save print or send Apache OpenOffice displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices See Figure 262 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents Apache OpenOffice sends the e mails Mail Merge Wizard Steps Save print or send the document Select starting document Select one of the options below Select document type Save starting document Select address list Save merged document Print merged document Create salutation E Mail settings To E mail Address Copy to Subject Edit document Personalize document Save print or send Send as HTML Message best email message odk Send all documents O
13. Figure 312 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in the included Help you can define your own You can assign shortcuts to standard AOO functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire Apache OpenOffice suite Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or AOO s predefined shortcut Caution keys Many key assignments are universally understood shortcuts such as F41 for Help and are always expected to provide certain results Although you can easily A reset the shortcut key assignments to the AOO defaults changing some common shortcut keys can cause confusion frustration and possible data loss or corruption especially if other users share your computer To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below 1 Select Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Customize dialog opens 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of OpenOffice org select the OpenOffice org button 3 Next select the required function from the Category and Function lists 4 Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right 5 Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function ar
14. Options OpenOffice org User Data General Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Online Update Figure 278 OpenOffice org options Note The Back button has the same effect on all pages of the Options dialog It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened OpenOffice org Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 269 User Data options Because the name or initials stored in the OpenOffice org User Data page are used for several things including document properties created by and last edited by information and the name of the author of notes and changes you should ensure that the correct information appears here Fill in the form Shown in Figure 279 or amend or delete any existing incorrect information Address Company First Last name Initials Jared Kobos JK Street City State Zip Country Region Title Position Tel Home Work Fax E mail Figure 279 Filling in user data General options The options on the OpenOffice org General page are described below Help W Tips Extended tips a Help Agent Reset Help Agent Help formatting Open Save dialogs V Use OpenOffice org dialogs Document status Printing sets document modified status Year two digits Interpret as years between 1930 gt and 2029 Figure 280 Setting general options for OpenOffice org 270 Taming
15. icon from the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Arrowheads menu Several types of arrowheads are available Each end of the line can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines They have no effect on an object s border E _ s ra zl y v t _ amp _ Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 165 Customizing line and arrow styles You can modify the line and arrow styles and create your own See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide for details Editing the inside fill of an object The Apache OpenOffice term for the inside of an object is Area fill The area fill of an object can be a uniform color a gradient a hatching or an image It can be made partly or fully transparent and can throw a shadow In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills see Chapter 4 in the Draw Guide for details Adding a shadow In Draw shadows are considered as an area property Click on the Shadow Ly icon on the Line and Filling toolbar You can customize the position distance color and transparency of shadows by using Format gt Area gt Shadow or by right clicking on the selected object and choosing Area gt Shadow Adding transparency You can make objects partly or fully transparent or even
16. icon to view the certificate Section or object information When the cursor is on a section heading or list item or when an object Such as a picture or table is selected information about that item appears in this field Double clicking in this area opens a relevant dialog For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click an icon to change between single page side by side and book layout views The effect varies with the combination of window width and zoom factor in use You can edit the document In any view Figure 36 View layouts single side by side book Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 51 Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the document window _ 8 amp 100 Changing document views Writer has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view When in Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the status bar In Web Layout you can use the Zoom slider You can also choose Vie
17. smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it MathType to OpenOffice org Math OpenOffice org to MathType is checked in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an OpenOffice org Math object File formats Apache OpenOffice can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of OpenOffice org It is strongly recommended that you use ODF as default file format However you can save files in other formats if you wish i When sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the Tip safest option is to convert the document to PDF AOO provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF See Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E Mailing 306 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt and ott Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format te
18. 3 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an Apache OpenOffice template folder To import a template into a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save 46 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Examples of style use The following examples of common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from
19. And many more These features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 33 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice Some other features of the Writer interface are covered in this chapter Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 49 Edit View g Insert Format Table Tools Window Help e ae 5 J 4 i 1 a lhe ai Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar il Status bar i Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT STD G are Figure 33 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features Page 3 14 Default English USA IMSRT SEO Page number Page style Language Insert Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 34 Left end of status bar Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 If any bookmarks have been defined in the document a right click on this field pops up a list of bookmarks click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click on this field The Navigator opens Click in the Page Number
20. Field Name Field Type ype Text VARCHAR PaymentiD Integer INTEGER Figure 163 Table in Design View If you have several tables to create with the same fields design one table and produce the other tables by cutting and pasting See Creating a table by copying an existing table on page 179 182 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and Cash for cash purchases 1 Inthe main database window click on the Tables icon Figure 156 In the list of tables right click on Payment Type and select Open from the pop up menu a Enter Dan in the Type column in the first row Press the Tab key to move to the second row Notice that the PaymentID value for this row changes from lt AutoField gt to 0 b Enter Kevin in the second row The PaymentID changes to 1 c Enter Cash in the third row The PaymentID changes to 2 2 Save and close the table window You can also use the Enter key to move from entry field to entry field or use the down arrow key to move from row to row Tip Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expe
21. Figure 275 Left normal letters right same letter heights Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment of characters Choices are left align center right align word justify and stretch justify The effects of the text alignment can only be seen if the Left Align text spans over two or more lines In the stretch justify mode all the lines are filled completely Genter hh 4 Right Align Word Justify Stretch Justify Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 265 AY v Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the character spacing and i kerning in the object For custom spacing input a percentage value 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is tight spacing more than 100 is expanded spacing Tight Normal very Tight Logse Very Loose Custom Kern Character Pairs Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolbar changes to show the options for editing the object The toolbar shown in Figure 276 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer Line Colour Area Style Filling ka Figure 276 Formatting toolbar for a Fontwork object in Writer This figure shows the toolbar floating In its default docked position it is one of the toolbars located below the menu bar The example toolbar has also been customized to show all of the available options by default only a subset of these
22. Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 binary xlsb Chapter 12 Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 305 Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof HTML Document htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel pxl Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg and otp Impress 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxi and sti and the following presentation formats Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and Starlmpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Document Format pdf Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxd and std and the following graphic formats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxm StarMath
23. Submit format El Allow duplicate field names Export bookmarks F Export comments Export automatically inserted blank pages Embed standard fonts Figure 252 General page of PDF Options dialog Images section e Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other kinds of images or graphics e JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 works well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality e Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality For viewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of 72dpi for Windows or 96dpi GNU Linux is sufficient while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 or 600 dpi depending on the capability of the printer Higher dpi settings greatly increase the size of the exported file EPS Encapsulated PostScript images with embedded previews are exported only Note as previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 243 General section PDF A 1a PDF A is an ISO standard for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the information necessary for faithful reproduction Such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security and encryption PDF tags are written If you select PDF A 1a t
24. User defined dictionaries business All soffice All IgnoreAllList AIN Edit C e Options C Check grammar as you type Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalization Figure 303 Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling Some considerations 288 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started e If you do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in the Options list e lf you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling Here you can also check which user defined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons OpenOffice org does not have a grammar checker but you can install a grammar Note checker extension such as Language Tool and access that tool from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Adding functionality with extensions on page 299 for more information Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with OpenOffice org If you are using a Netscape o
25. Writer it shows Headings Tables Text frames Comments Graphics Bookmarks and other items as shown in Figure 15 In Calc it shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items In Impress and Draw it shows Slides Pictures and other items To open the Navigator click its icon g on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Apache OpenOffice window or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 20 Click the marker or arrow by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that category To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon Click this icon again to show the list box The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it e When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump directly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping Apache OpenOffice s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the Content View icon al Until you click the
26. You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Calc window or leave it floating To dock or float the Navigator hold down the Control key and double click in an empty area near the icons in the Navigator dialog Eq Navigator Row T 7 FS Sheets Sheetl Sheet2 Sheet3 s Range names gt amp Database Ranges P Linked areas gy Graphics Graphics 1 lb OLE objects j Comments sample wy Drawing objects Untitled1 active Me Figure 68 The Navigator in Calc Column The Navigator displays lists of all the objects in a document grouped into categories If an indicator plus sign or arrow appears next to a category at least one object of this kind exists To open a category and see the list of items click on the indicator To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top click the Contents icon Click this icon again to show the list Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell normally has a darker black border This black border indicates where the focus is See Figure 69 If a group of cells is selected they have a highlight color usually gray with the focus cell having a dark border Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where you want the focus to be and click the left mouse button This changes the focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cells are a large distance apart Chapter 4 Gett
27. 204 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 196 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record in the main form click either the Next Record icon or the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data is shown in the form Ti p If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then press Enter to take you to that record Error Reference source not found is a record with data inserted in its fields Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 692 704 2 Kevin Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 428 778 7 Dan Figure 198 Sample record of the Vacation form and subform Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Query results are special tables within the database To demonstrate the use of queries we will use two different methods Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard The information we might want from the Fuel table includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using
28. It can either be edited as part of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a part of the cell style Note See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc in the Calc Guide for more information 102 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different situations Using automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or press Ctr 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 89 under Properties select Wrap text automatically and click OK The results are shown in Figure 90 Numbers Font I Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection E Text alignment Horizontal Vertical opt Text orientation Degrees C Vertically stacked 0 oa Reference edge a MEE C Hyphenation active Figure 89 Format Cells gt Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap text automatically So they text wi
29. Notes Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scaling factor 100 Figure 98 The Sheet tab of the Page Style dialog Page Order When a sheet will print on more than one page of paper you can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way The two available options are shown below 112 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Top to bottom then right Details You can specify which details to print These details include Row and column headers Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid Comments prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference Objects and graphics Charts Drawing objects Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results Zero Values prints cells with a zero value Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties Note they are also a part of the page style s properties Therefore different page styles Scale can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the spreadsheet Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data will print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed compactly or if you want t
30. Paths page you can change the location of files associated with or used by OpenOffice org to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 285 and click Edit On the Select Path dialog not shown may also be titled Edit Paths add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that some items can have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 275 i You can use the entries in the OpenOffice org Paths dialog to compile a list of Tip files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Paths used by OpenOffice org Type Path AutoCorrect C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org s user a Auto T ext C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 usera Backups C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org useri b Gallery C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 userig Graphics C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 userig My Documents C Users Jared Documents Templates C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org s user t Temporary files C Users Jared AppData Local Temp 4 Th t Default Edit Figur
31. Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for deleting a single column or row above 90 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are several ways to insert a new sheet The first step for all of the methods is to select the sheets that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then any of the following options can be used e Choose Insert gt Sheet from the menu bar e Right click on the sheet tab and choose Insert Sheet e Click in an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs Click here to insert a new sheet FI Inactive Sheet 3 Active Sheet Inactive Sheet Figure 73 Creating a new sheet Each method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 74 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name Insert Sheet Position Before current sheet gt After current sheet Cancel New
32. There you can choose whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers and you can manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked ina specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as Language Tool from http www languagetool org and access it from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 11 for more about installing extensions Language Tool adds a new menu item and submenu to the Tools menu from which you can configure the tool and check or recheck the document Using built in language tools Writer provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in various languages The main advantage of changing the language is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is especially useful when you insert text such as web addresses or programming language snippets that you do not want to check for spelling Specifying the language
33. With Fontwork you can create graphical text art objects to make your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of AOO but you will notice small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Fontwork rx TA t Aa AV Figure 271 The floating Fontwork toolbar Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 263 e If you click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fontwork options as shown in Figure 267 The contents of this toolbar vary depending on the AOO component with which it is being used Creating a Fontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon mi If the Drawing toolbar is not visible go to View gt Toolbars gt Drawing to display it Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style Posie fwo Fonok anioi JAIN slid panto a Doi eraa Te rontwork cartes Figure 272 The Fontwork Gallery 2 Inthe Fontwork Gallery select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the colored squares around the edge indicating that the
34. all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document From this menu you can also apply some basic formatting to the text of the comment You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu To navigate from one comment to another open the Navigator F5 expand the Comments section and click on the comment text to move the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document Right click on the comment to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate through the comments using the keyboard Use Ctr Alt Page Down to move to the next comment and Ctr A t Page Up to move to the previous comment Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you start make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels Such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 and so on These are what will appear in your table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you want the table of contents to be in
35. amount and name in the sentence Use lt Supper gt and lt SPayment gt for the third set of amount and name in the sentence 7 Final result On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt and our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt 8 Add data to the fields of the sentence e Click the gray box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 194 e Click the Data to Fields icon circled This should fill the fields with the data from the row you chose Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sentence changes to this selected row of data e Save the document if you want to use it as an example later ae kep A S tn amp Y v Seow Date Odometer Tol BPayment Friday June 26 530 50 00 11 00 Dan Saturday June 778 48 00 4 00 13 00 Dan Figure 194 Selected row in data source window Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 201 Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps fewer steps Some of the steps will be quite similar 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Control Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to be a row in your table when the rows are not consecutive To select co
36. both dimensions will A change Failure to do so will cause the picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality it is better to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress Adding tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides by choosing the Table contents type It is also possible to add a table outside a contents box in a number of ways e Go to Insert gt Table on the main menu bar e Click on the Table icon EEA on the main toolbar or table toolbar e After inserting a new slide click the Insert Table icon e Select a style option from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane on the table toolbar to open the Table Design section of the Tasks pane and then select a style The first three methods above opens the Insert Table dialog where you can select the required number of columns and rows Alternatively clicking on the black arrow next to the Table icon Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 139 displays a graphic allowing you to drag and select the number of required rows and columns for your table x Insert Table Number of columns Is Number of rows 2 O e cancel Figure 123 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of the Tasks pane Note creates a table based on that style If you create a table by another method you ca
37. edit document properties before saving 283 editing data Calc 101 ellipse drawing 157 en dash and em dash 58 envelope printing 240 envelope printing 240 EPS images in PDF 243 equation inserting 221 numbering 231 equation editor 221 brackets 229 derivative markup 230 Elements window 222 equations over more than one line 229 floating window 227 font size 228 formula layout 229 limits to sum integral 229 markup 224 matrix markup 230 right click menu 224 export directly as PDF 242 export HTML 286 exporting Flash 248 PDF 242 XHTML 248 extended tips 271 Extension Manager 43 extensions 299 DataPilot Tools 301 extensions and addons sources of 16 Writer 49 fields bookmarks 76 cross reference 76 Fields dialog box References tab 77 file locations 275 file sharing options 278 Fill Format 33 Fill tool Calc 98 fill editing 166 filtering visible cells Calc 109 flip an object 167 floating toolbars 19 20 floating window 20 flowchart symbols 161 font history 274 ignore settings when importing HTML 286 options 278 preview 273 replacement table 278 replacements 278 sizes for HTML 286 font resizing Impress 136 Fontwork alignment 265 anchoring 267 area options 267 attributes 266 character spacing 266 creating an object 264 editing an object 265 Formatting toolbar 266 Gallery 264 grouping 267 line options 266 moving and resizing objects 268 positioning options 267 same letter heights 265 toolbar
38. gt Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position as the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode gray hashed border shown in Figure 119 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 in the mpress Guide 134 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Using text boxes O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOO 4 Vg RQ lick on the Text icon on the Drawing toolbar The default position of the drawing toolbar towards the bottom of the screen If the Drawing toolbar with the text icon is not visible hoose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing SS yn Click and drag to draw a text box on the slide This sets the width Do not worry about the eight because the text box will expand as you type QW Sy o reposition the text box to a different part of the slide see on page to change the dth ZY i gM f f Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is ow in edit mode and a hashed border appears WV Type or paste your text in the text box RRR Click outside the text box to deselect it NSSS Figure
39. if cell C3 has a top border which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2 Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 11 for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format gt AutoFormat AutoFormat Format Formatting i Rename Number format Font Alignment Borders Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 95 Choosing an AutoFormat 106 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Note The AutoFormat feature can only be applied if the selected set of cells consist of at least 3 columns and 3 rows and includes the column and row headers 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to includ
40. mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert OpenOffice org OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save al m Excel to OpenOffice org Cale or reverse PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress or reverse L Load and convert the object Convert and save the object Figure 298 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page affect HTML pages imported into OpenOffice org and those exported from AOO See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help for more information Font sizes Import Size1 7 E Use English USA locale for numbers Size 10 Import unknown HTML tags as fields C Ignore font settings Size 3 1 Export Size 4 14 Netscape Navigator Size 5 18 OpenOffice org Basic Size 6 24 E Display warning m _ Print layout V Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe Windows 1 Figure 299 Choosing HTML compatibility options Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 285 Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Import Use English USA locale for numb
41. only one social security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defined in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how to use a database we will create one for automobile expenses In the process we will be explaining how a database works Planning a database The first step in creating a database Is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to later write the answers At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take some time to think You may have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers developed before created a database for automobile expenses had an idea of what wanted before started but as began asking questions and listing the answers discovered that needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for the car s license plate and dr
42. sheets and cells Calc works with documents called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each sheet containing cells arranged in rows and columns A particular cell is identified by its row number and column letter Cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas and so on that make up the data to display and manipulate Each spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells In Calc 3 4 each sheet can have a maximum of 1 048 576 rows and 1024 columns Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 60 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 79 Title bar The Title bar located at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet When the spreadsheet is newly created its name is Untitled X where X is anumber When you save a spreadsheet for the first time you are prompted to enter a name of your choice Menu bar Under the Title bar is the Menu bar On a Mac the Menu bar is at the top of the screen above the Title bar the same location as for other Mac applications When you choose one of the menus a Submenu appears with other options You can modify the Menu bar as discussed in Chapter 11 Setting up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice Ei Untitled 1 OpenOffice ore Cale Hile zdi ew olnsert Format loos Data Window Help i AB sf E i AT Ep m de Al SE oe FS BS tb ib a 84 G amp EL D
43. 00 1 00 k 0 00 8 00 26 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 4 00 55 50 8 00 11 67 9 181 5 Klein Mike 26 00 1 00 1 00 11 50 8 00 6 00 0 00 5 00 6 00 3 60 3 60 47 50 10 00 10 72 7 186 5 Johnson Tom 27 00 1 00 3 00 0 00 13 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 00 11 82 6 213 0 Doe John 27 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 17 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 3 50 54 00 9 00 11 96 4 266 0 Doe Jane 26 00 1 00 3 00 9 00 16 00 28 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 79 50 10 00 10 19 67 3 172 0 Kupfer Peter 26 00 1 00 3 00 16 00 20 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 41 00 6 50 20 83 9 224 5 Newton Issac 28 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 15 00 23 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 57 50 9 00 11 21 80 6 207 5 26 00 0 00 2 00 5 00 15 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 0 00 62 60 9 00 78 1 209 0 Matteson Brittany 28 00 0 00 3 00 3 00 17 00 22 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 00 11 23 79 A aa 212 SlMurphy Kathleen 26 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 16 00 11 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 400 53 50 9 00 Figure 77 Frozen rows and columns Splitting the screen Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also known as splitting the screen The screen can be split either horizontally or vertically or both You can therefore have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which
44. 119 Creating and editing text boxes Using text boxes created from the Text toolbar Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Text toolbar Figure 120 If the Text toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Text 2 Click and drag to draw a text box on the slide This sets the width Do not worry about the height because the text box will expand as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode a hashed border see Figure 119 4 Type or paste your text into the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it Text 7 x TB amp ox HE Figure 120 Text toolbar In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is Note available only when Asian languages are enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages Click on the m button in the drawing toolbar or text toolbar to create a vertical text box Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 135 Quick font resizing Impress has icons A Ua on the Text Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease font size of selected text The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use Pasting text Text may be inserted into the text box by copying it from another document and past
45. 194 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 8 Change labels and fields in the subform The subform is located at the bottom of the form We want to widen the Date column change the field in the PaymentType column to a list box and change the label for the PaymentType column to two words To widen the Date column move the mouse pointer over the dividing line between the Date and FuelCost columns When the pointer changes shape click and drag to move the divider to the right To change the PaymentType column 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Right click the label PaymentType and choose Replace with gt List box from the menu Again right click the label PaymentType to open the menu Select Column to open the Properties dialog Figure 184 In the Label box change PaymentType to Payment Type Click the Data tab From the Type of list contents dropdown list select Sql Type the following exactly as it is written SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Close the Properties dialog General Data Events NAIMC cccccccccocceccecceeees PaymentT ype Fr PaymentType H Enabled Yes Alignment 0 Default 7 Border color Default x Line count seat Default selection I Additional information He SNL acces Figure 184 Properties window for control in a subform Step 9 Add headings to groups This step is easier
46. 263 265 Form Wizard 185 formatting pages 66 Formatting toolbar 19 formatting Calc AutoFormat 106 conditional 108 themes 107 F formula bar Calc 81 fax icon adding to toolbar 296 formula editor FDF 244 See equation editor 227 features formula files opening 306 Calc 79 formula layout 229 Draw 149 Free Software Foundation FSF 304 Impress 119 freeform line Draw 158 Index 311 Function Wizard Calc 81 G Gallery adding objects 258 creating anew theme 259 deleting images 259 deleting objects 259 hide show 257 inserting object as background 257 location 259 Opening 256 themes 257 views icon detailed 257 general options 270 geometric shapes Draw 160 gluepoints 160 GNU Linux system requirements 16 gradients 167 grammar checker 60 graphic files Opening 306 saving 307 graphic styles formatting text 136 graphics adding from file 253 linking 254 grid options 154 grid points 153 guiding lines 155 H header different on right and left pages 48 headers and footers Calc 115 Help Agent 271 Help system 9 Help Tips 271 hidden objects 162 hiding and showing data Calc 108 high contrast 271 history of Apache OpenOffice 303 HTML compatibility 285 HTML export 286 hyphenation manual 66 icon size and style user interface 273 icons in menus 273 ignore font settings when importing HTML 286 image map 260 images adding from file 253 linking 254 scanned 256 importing files 305 importing numbers from a
47. April May ig U al oo New oo Sat Figure 86 Predefined fill series 2 Click New The Entries box is cleared 3 Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line Click Add The new list will now appear in the Lists box 4 Click OK at the bottom of the dialog to save the new list Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat ACT A Discard Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd NSW Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S NT January February March April May QLD dd SA TAS VIC WA i Ll Figure 87 Defining a new fill series 100 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column November December 13 To use a selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format is defined as Text Click on the entry you require 20 Validating cell contents When creating spreadsheets for other people to use you may want to make sure they enter data that is valid or appropriate for the cell You can also use validation in your own work as a guide to entering data that is either complex or rarely used Fill series and selection lists can handle some types of data but they are li
48. Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 239 General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout orem Fa 2 Order left to right then down 3 A O Draw a border 3 left to right then down top to bottom then right Layout Order top to bottom then right O Draw a border left to right then down top to bottom then right 1 3 2 4 3 Inthe Page sides section select whether to print all pages or only some pages 4 Click the Print button Tip In Writer to print two pages per sheet in facing pages book layout style print from Print Preview instead See page 241 Selecting pages sheets slides to print In addition to printing a full document you can choose to print individual pages sheets slides ranges of pages sheets slides or a selection of a document The details vary slightly in Writer Calc Draw and Impress as described in this section Writer Printing an individual page 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the page to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence number of the page you want to print The preview box changes to show the selected page If you have restarted page numbering within the document the sequence number is not the same as the page number 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the P
49. Gallery To delete an image from a theme that you created 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Note Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not delete the file from the hard disk or other location Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 266 2 Inthe Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only theme that you have added to the Gallery you cannot delete any of the inbuilt themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools gt Gallery 2 Inthe left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the Gallery the files are not moved or copied only the location of each new object is added as a reference In a work group you may have a
50. In previous versions of OpenOffice org the standard fonts Times Helvetica Courier Symbol and ZapfDingbats were only embedded into the PDF when the resulting file was of the PDF A type since the PDF A standards requires this From OpenOffice org version 3 3 you can choose to embed these fonts in all PDF documents created by Apache OpenOffice to enhance display accuracy in PDF viewers Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page Figure 253 you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page Figure 254 you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display Window options section Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar 244 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started General Initial View Links Security Panes Page only Bookmarks and page Thumbnails and page
51. OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started When you select text this tooloar changes to show text formatting options The context menu When an object is selected you can right click on the object to bring up a context menu which provides additional access to the options shown above and another way to change an object s attributes The entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Editing lines and borders Lines arrows and the borders of an object are managed through the Line dialog An object s border is just another type of gt A line You can change some properties from the Line and Filling toolbar To see more options select the object and click on the Line 4 icon or right click on the object and choose Line from the context menu This opens the Line dialog Common line properties In most cases the property you want to change is the line s style solid dashed invisible and so on its color or its width These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 135 You can also edit these properties from the Line dialog where you can also change the line s transparency Figure 151 illustrates different degrees of transparency Figure 151 The vertical lines have different levels of transparency 0 25 and 50 Drawing arrows Arrowheads and other line endings usually referred to collectively as arrows are a line property Select a line and click on the Arrow Style
52. PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WMF and XPM Chapter 12 Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 307 Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp and odg Impress 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot StarDraw Starlmpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving from Writer Web Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Text Encoded OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Exporting to other formats Apache OpenOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under Save As look under Export as well AOO can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the E
53. Quotes Options or Replace tabs to deactivate any of the features that you do not want On the Replace tab you can also delete unwanted word pairs and add new ones as required AutolInput When you are typing in a cell Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column To turn the Autolnput on and off set or remove the check mark in front of Tools gt Cell Contents gt Autolnput Automatic date conversion Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates To ensure that an entry that looks like a date is interpreted as text type an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from input The most basic ability is to drop and drag the contents of one cell to another with a mouse Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document Using the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill tool is a way to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit gt Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down L
54. Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF Apache OpenOffice first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use Apache OpenOffice s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use Apache OpenOffice s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge of the Writer Guide for details e Create the document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard select Use the current document and click Next Mail Merge Wizard Steps Select starting document for the mail merge 1 Select starting document Select the document upon which to base the mail merge document 2 Select document type 3 Insert address block Use the current document 4 Create salutation F CEREAN ee 5 Adjust layout 6 Edit document Start from existing document Browse 7 Personalize document Start from a template Browse 8 Save print or send Start from a rece
55. Snack No e Close the Properties dialog 3 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to Misc Notes You can modify all of the listings in the Properties window For example if you Tip change the Alignment from Left to Center the word or words in the label are centered within the label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches Breakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the payment fields were changed in step 2 but Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Right click Breakfast and choose Position and Size On the Position and Size dialog change Width to 2 cm 2 Repeat for the other listed controls using 3 cm for Misc Payment Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 191 When changing the position or size of an entire control use the Position and Size dialog or the drag and drop method When working with either the label or the field but not both at the same time Caution you can use the Properties dialog to make these changes when you want to be exact However you need to be careful not to accide
56. This button may look like the X shown in Figure 13 It may be in a different location on your operating system Figure 13 Close icons In Windows and Linux if more than one OpenOffice org window is open each window looks like the sample shown on the left in Figure 13 Closing this window leaves the other OpenOffice org windows open If only one OpenOffice org window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 13 Notice the small X below the large X Clicking the small X closes the document but leaves OpenOffice org open Clicking the large X closes Apache OpenOffice completely Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 25 If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The document is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Caution Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently made changes or A worse still your entire file Closing Apache OpenOffice To close Apache OpenOffice completely choose File gt Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document above If all the documents have been saved Apache OpenOffice closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in
57. Tithe bar of floating toolbar Biet and nea N x ng Se l t Pf b te 8 ie I I Figure 5 Moving a floating toolbar Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move resize or dock them to an edge 20 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To dock a window or toolbar hold down the Control key and double click on the frame of the floating window or in a vacant area near the icons at the top of the floating window to dock it in its last position Styles and Formatting xX Definition Term Figure Figure 6 Control click to dock or undock To undock a window hold down the Control key and double click on the frame or a vacant area near the icons at the top of the docked window Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 11 To access a toolbar s customization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar Toolbar customization icons Ss Te amp Figure 7 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons are indicated by an outline around the icon Click on icons to h
58. Writer s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit gt Selection Mode gt Block Area or click several times in the status bar on STD until it changes to BLK Page 1 1 Default English USA INSRT STD 7 Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown below January March April ane July September October December Figure 42 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasting text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Writer document To move cut and paste selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Ctrl key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 55 When you paste text the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it If you click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon or press Control
59. Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer while the other pages do With Apache OpenOffice you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with Apache OpenOffice Figure 31 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Default Figure 31 Flow of page styles Dividing a document into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown in Figure 32 Default Figure 32 Dividing a document into chapters using page styles Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document c
60. Z To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted e Choose Edit gt Paste Special or e Click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon or e Click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending on the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 43 for an example with text on the clipboard SNE epp vy A GE OpenOffice org Writer DDE link HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Figure 43 Paste Special menu Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has two ways to find text within a document the Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find amp Replace dialog In the dialog you can e Find and replace words and phrases e Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search e Find and replace specific formatting e Find and replace paragraph styles Find X Using the Find toolbar If the Find toolbar is not visible you can display it using View gt Toolbars i b gt Find To use the Find toolbar click in the box and type your search text then press Enter to find the next occurrence of that term Click the Find Next or Find Previous buttons up and down arrows as needed Using the Find amp Replace dialog To display the Find amp Replace dial
61. a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from this template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and menu customization All documents in Apache OpenOffice are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text spreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template Apache OpenOffice uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with Apache OpenOffice See Setting a default template on page 44 for more information What are styles A style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to writing documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any f
62. a permanent fusion of objects leading to a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and the operation is not reversible Grouping by common selection When several objects are selected any operations you carry out are applied to all of the objects For example you can rotate a group of objects in its entirety Groups obtained through common selection of several objects are undone as soon as you click outside the group However you can group objects and keep those selected objects grouped together Maintaining groups and undoing groups To group objects first select the objects then right click and choose Group from the pop up menu You can also use the keyboard shortcut Ctr Shift G or choose Modify gt Group from the menu bar When objects are grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all members of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 169 The objects of a group retain their own individual properties To undo a group right click and choose Ungroup from the pop up menu use the keyboard shortcut Ctr A t Shift G or choose Modify gt Ungroup from the menu bar You can edit a member of a group individually without breaking the group To do this right click and choose Enter group or double click on the group Combining objects In contrast to grouping functions combinations create
63. also offer free tips and tutorials This forum provides community support for Apache OpenOffice and other programs http forum openoffice org en forum Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in Apache OpenOffice Preface 9 What s new in Apache OpenOffice 3 4 This section Summarizes some of the changes since OpenOffice org 3 3 For details see the Release Notes for Apache OpenOffice 3 4 and 3 4 1 http www openoffice org development releases 3 4 0 html http www openoffice org development releases 3 4 1 html Faster startup Support for Scalable Vector Graphics SVG Enhanced RTF export Reduced PDF file size Improved ODF 1 2 encryption support Improved navigation in Styles and Formatting Navigator and options dialogs New regular expressions regexp engine New Color Picker dialog Enhanced or additional graphics support in addition to SVG Support for Line Cap property for thick lines and 3D objects Support for shear transformations for graphic objects in Draw Impress and Calc Support for attributes and transformations for OLE objects in Draw Impress and Calc Enhanced crop support and mirroring for graphical objects Calc DataPilot renamed Pivot Table and no longer limited in the number of fields supported Improved CSV export new CSV export option Quote all text cells Support
64. also specify the position and size rotation and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing object 1 Right click on the drawing object and then choose Position and Size from the pop up menu The Position and Size dialog is displayed 2 Choose any properties as required Resizing a drawing object An object is resized in a similar way to an image Select the object click on one of the eight handles around it and drag it to its new position For a scaled resizing select one of the corner handles and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the handle to its new position For more sophisticated control of the size of the object choose Format gt Object gt Position and Size from the menu bar Use the Position and Size dialog to set the width and height independently If the Keep ratio option is selected then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained allowing for a scaled resizing Grouping drawing objects To group drawing objects 1 Select one object then hold down the Shift key and select the others you want to include in the group The bounding box expands to include all the selected objects 2 With the objects selected hover the mouse pointer over one of the objects and choose Format gt Group gt Group from the menu bar or right click and choose Group gt Group from the pop up menu Note You cannot include an embedded or linked graphic in a group with drawing objects Using Fontwork
65. and translations to appear side by side in what appear to be columns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can type in both columns This is a borderless table Each pair of words is in a separate row and each word is in a cell of the table EREE ULE rE irag ae nai sr om a te areri anal La mT a a eai og ua maT Tenka bonn GO TTS Dinga Tra L Gee Sel Te Aam ia es el Tr AT Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 67 Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style To insert a header choose Insert gt Header gt Default or the page style if not Default Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Choose File gt Properties gt Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert gt Header gt Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when print
66. as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit relationships from a diagram view Base incorporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC compliant or JOBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL Math formula editor Math is Apache OpenOffice s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can also work as a standalone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in web pages and other documents not created by Apache OpenOffice Minimum requirements Apache OpenOffice 3 4 requires one of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows XP 2003 Vista 7 or 8 e GNU Linux Kernel version 2 6 and glibc 2 11 1 or higher e Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger or higher Some features wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 5 x or higher be installed on your computer Although Apache OpenOffice will work without Java support some features will not be available How to get and install the software You can download the installation package approximately 150MB f
67. aspects of the cell can be deleted To delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 101 g Delete Contents Selection OK a Text Numbers Date amp time Formulas Notes E Formats Objects Figure 88 Delete Contents dialog Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the Original formatting Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase See Dick run is in a cell and it needs to be changed to See Dick run fast It is often useful to do this without deleting the old cell contents first The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cursor inside the cell You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2 key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatted in several ways
68. b Relations button Figure 235 After selecting Relations Step 4 Click on the a b symbol The equation editor now shows the markup pi lt gt simeq a gt 226 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 5 Delete the lt gt text and add 3 14159 at the end of the equation We end up with the markup pi Simeq 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 236 r 3 14159 fata e Figure 236 Final result Customizations Formula editor as a floating window The formula editor can cover a large part of the Writer window To turn the formula editor into a floating window do this 1 Hover the mouse over the editor frame as shown in Figure 237 2 Hold down the Control key and double click Figure 237 Hold down the Control key and double click on the border of the formula editor to turn it into a floating window Figure 238 shows the result You can dock the floating window again by using the same steps Hold down the Control key and double click the window frame Commands Figure 238 Formula editor as a floating window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 227 How can make a formula bigger This is one of the most common questions people ask about Math The answer is simple but not intuitive 1 Start the formula editor and choose Format gt Font size Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help Font
69. be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format only uses the actual Note number of characters in a field up to the limit set So a field containing 20 characters will only use space for 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes Notes No changes are required NumberofTracks Change the Field Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Each field has a Field Type which must be specified Types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for Note example a name or a description use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 Create a primary key should be checked 2 Select option Use an existing field as a primary key 3 Inthe Fieldname
70. ccccceeccsecseeceecsecesesseceuecseeeuecseseaeceeeeeecaeseuenaessueeaesseeaeeaeeesesensages 26 Using the Open and Save As CiAlOGS cccccccsccseccsecsecssecsecauetseseuecseseseeaeeeeecsesseeeueeaesaueteeegags 26 Usta meN Via O E a EEE A er Undoing and redoing ge gol 6s ete one ner een oe nn aes hen yet ene eee 28 Chapter 2 RISING Styles and TOI AlS Svecicestovssnccasauvcspestacearscnszwentsusnacestowananessaseasnesinneebstanawsassdecieenntesonenatauecs 31 ages lige E E EE terme net eer e ee reer mee meen erate ete eer Tener 31 Ars a E E EAE EE TE eee eae eee ee 31 PO SICS isseire i EEEE ei N TATE a E NaN Ea aN 32 Mod OS are EEE EE eee oe hes EEE 34 creating NEW CUStOM SYI ccnn a aE EEEO EEA 36 coming and moving SVE aeni EE eee eee eer 37 B EE cls eee ee oe en ENE ee eee ee nee NEE ANE E NEE ee ee nee EET 39 Using a telqgleltci om cele cys oreo 060 151 9 nae ee mene ne eerie esnnnn reer tee ee Sct ern eeRn eer enr ee ner 39 Creating a ee cc ptt creo scm gnore tnestine ence sa oi anasncatinacaeaaceoesawaasaaaaieasieeseeaaacnapsecatusiaassenaearesne 40 EdimMg a ANPA airinn EEEE RE ersten acdc nse Anba iari ENEA CEED 42 Adding templates using the Extension Managel ccccccsccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees 43 Setting a default template 0 n0annanoannananonnonnnnnnresrernrnnrrrrnrrsrrnrrnrrrrrarrnrrnrrnrrnernrrnrsrernernrnnrnreo 44 Associating a document with a different template
71. click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template 40 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started when you want to use it For example you might save Impress templates under the Presentations category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 45 6 Click OK to save the new template Templates Mew kemplate Templates Cancel ateqories Templates Help Edit Organizer Figure 27 Saving a new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be included in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided double sided and paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character page frame numbering and paragraph styles e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template may contain your name address and salutation You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 11 Setting Up and Custom
72. comments Select the Properties button to display a dialog where you can choose portrait or landscape orientation which paper tray to use and the paper size to print on On the Options tab of the Print dialog Figure 246 the last item Use only paper tray from printer preference is not available in Calc General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Options E Print to file E Create single print jobs for collated output E Use only paper tray from printer preferences Figure 246 General print options Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper You can print multiple pages of a document on one sheet of paper To do this 1 Inthe Print dialog select the Page Layout tab Figure 247 J General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout 297mm AA Order left to right then down 1 2 Draw a border around each page Brochure Pdvdty C 22dqg and Lre lrg Page sides Front sides right pages Figure 247 Printing multiple page per sheet of paper 2 In the Layout section select from the drop down list the number of pages to print per sheet The preview panel on the left of the Print dialog shows how the printed document will look When printing more than 2 pages per sheet you can choose the order in which they are printing across and down the paper The two pictures below show the difference
73. control how the program uses your computer s memory and how much memory it requires Before changing them you may wish to consider the following points More memory can make AOO faster and more convenient for example more undo steps require more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether If your documents contain a lot of objects such as images or the objects are large AOO s performance may improve if you increase the memory for AOO or the memory per object If you find that objects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them increase the number of objects in the cache The objects are still in the file even if you cannot see them on screen To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes AOO start faster the trade off is AOO uses some memory even when not being used This option sometimes called Enable systray quickstarter is not available on all operating systems 2 2 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started View options The options on the OpenOffice org View page affect the way the document window looks and behaves Some of these options are described below Set them to suit your personal preferences User Interface Graphics output Scaling 100 E Use hardware acceleration Icon size and style W Use An
74. database or data source A librarian might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fill information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Chapter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide 78 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc Using Spreadsheets in Apache OpenOffice What is Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component of Apache OpenOffice You can enter data usually numerical in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What if manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet Other features provided by Calc include e Functions which can be used to create formulas to perform complex calculations on data e Database functions to arrange store and filter data e Dynamic charts a wide range of 2D and 3D charts e Macros for recording and executing repetitive tasks e Ability to open edit and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets e Import and export of spreadsheets in multiple formats including HTML CSV PDF and PostScript If you want to use macros written in Microsoft Excel using the VBA macro code in Note Apache OpenOffice you must first edit the code in the OpenOffice org Basic IDE editor See Chapter 12 in the Calc Guide Spreadsheets
75. dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find the templates from and to which you want to copy Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 24 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other Caution If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other The style will be deleted from the list you A are dragging it from 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document has many styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 37 Template Management C My Templates 0207WG WorkingWithStyles_PHE CI Drawing 5 Untitled1 C HB Systems Commands C phb 7 Presentation C Presentation Backgrounds 7 Presentations 9 US Sizes Address Book outline numbering test sample od AJ OOoEmphasis AJ OOoCompuberCode AJ Oookeystrake AJ OOoChaphumber AJ OOoStrongEmphasis Default EF OOoT able Text T OOoFooter T OOoCompuberCode Documents Documents Figure 24 Copying a style from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a templ
76. document Figure 309 The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars from the menu bar 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolbar s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below 294 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Toolbar Mame New Toolbar 1 Cancel Save In Q penOffice org Writer Help Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add commands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 308 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section descri
77. drop down list select Collection D 4 Check Auto value if it is not already checked 5 Click Next A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three people living at the Same address and the database needs to distinguish between them Note The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table 178 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 4 Create the table 1 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes 2 Leave the option nsert data immediately checked 3 Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports Notice that a table named CD Collection is now listed in the Tables portion of the window Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make copies of
78. e Impress presentations e Draw vector graphics e Base database e Math equation editor It also covers some of the features common to all components including setup and customization styles and templates and printing For more detail see the user guides for the individual components Where to get more help This book the other Apache OpenOffice user guides the built in Help system and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program opening and saving files Help system Apache OpenOffice comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of Support for using the program To display the full Help system press F1 or select OpenOffice org Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate Tips Extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General If Tips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The Apache OpenOffice community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support See this web page http support openoffice org index html Users can get comprehensive online support from the community through mailing lists Other websites run by users
79. field and type the sequence number of the required page After a brief delay the display jumps to the selected page Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the current page style double click on this field The Page Style dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None Do not check spelling to exclude the text from a spelling check or choose More to open the Character dialog 50 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Insert mode Click to toggle between nsert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shift click when selecting text See Working with text on page 54 for more information about ADD and BLK Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Outline Numbering Level 2 B OG EG O a 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Information layout slider percent Figure 35 Right end of status bar Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the
80. for new conditional functions from ODF 1 2 New faster Linear Programming solver Chart Legend within a chart is now resizable Data axid now available for category charts Time axis now supported Enhanced chart visualization Math Option to save only used symbols for each formula Option to use automatic baseline for Math objects in Writer documents Symbol catalog now supports UTF 32 characters Draw Impress Better defaults for snap grid settings bullet spacing and indentation Changed default for copy when moving Animate outline shapes By 1st level paragraphs as default New default colors of drawing objects Setting default shadow distance for shapes Enhancement to the mouse as pen feature in impress slideshow Default full width for text in shapes Change outline default bullet symbol order Shortcut for inserting comments changed Set pixel resolution when exporting graphics Writer Asian Language Word Count now correct 10 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started What are the advantages of Apache OpenOffice Here are some of the advantages of Apache OpenOffice over proprietary office suites No licensing fees Apache OpenOffice is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost There are no hidden charges now or in the future Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with the Apache 2 license
81. for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise the file will be saved immediately Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button at the right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Adding functionality with extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Although individual extensions can be found in different places the official extension repository is at http extensions services openoffice org Some extensions are free of charge others are available for a fee Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer 2 InAOO select T
82. have selected a layout with one or more contents boxes this is a good time to decide what type of contents you want to insert Modifying the slide elements At this stage the slide contains elements that were included in the slide master as well those elements included in the selected slide layout It is however unlikely that the predefined layouts will suit all your needs You may want to remove any elements that are not required or insert objects such as text and graphics Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts it allows you to resize and move the layout elements It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited to the size and position of the layout boxes 132 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To resize a contents box click on the outer frame so that the 8 resizing handles are displayed To move it place the mouse cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes shape You can now click the left mouse button and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide To remove any unwanted elements do this 1 Click the element to highlight it The colored resizing handles show it is highlighted 2 Press the Delete key to remove it Caution Changes to any of the layouts included in Impress can only be made using View gt Normal which is the default Attempting any changes by modifying a A slide master although possible may result in unpredictable results and requires ex
83. ia ita Lexmark E232 amp Details z Chapter 8 i Printing Exporting and E mailing Range and copies rl ET All pages Number of copies 1 B Pages 11 25 ah R5 p v Collate b 13 b 2 selection 2 E _ Print in reverse page order Print h i 125 gt Comments None document only Help Print l Cancel Figure 244 The Print dialog Table 2 Print options in Apache OpenOffice components Feature Writer Calc Impress Draw Select pages sheets slides to print Yes Yes Yes Yes Print multiple pages sheets slides on one ple pag Yes Yes Yes Yes page Print a brochure Yes No Yes Yes Print envelopes Yes No No No Print labels or business cards Yes No No No Preview pages sheets before printing Yes Yes No No Selecting general printing options On the General tab of the Print dialog you can choose The printer from the printers available Which pages to print the number of copies to print and whether to collate multiple copies Range and copies section Whether to print a multiple page document in reverse page order to accommodate the output feed of the printer Whether to print any comments that are in the document and where to print the comments 234 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Print Comments None document only v_ None document only Comments only Place at end of document Place at end of page Cancel Figure 245 Choosing whether and where to print
84. icons for paragraph formatting Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 49 shows the Formatting toolbar customized to include only the icon for character formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View E Perut h Times New Roman e y BY u eRe YB AL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 114 12 13 44 415 1 Open Styles and Formatting 6 Italic 12 Font Color Window 7 Underline 13 Highlighting 2 Apply Style 8 Superscript 14 Background Color 3 Font Name 9 Subscript 15 Open Character Format 4 Font Size 10 Increase Font Dialog 5 Bold 11 Reduce Font Figure 49 Formatting toolbar showing icons for character formatting Tip To remove manual formatting select the text and choose Format gt Default Formatting or right click and choose Default Formatting Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Tools gt AutoCorrect Options If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is Tip the first place to look for the cause Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include e Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens underscores ___ or equal signs on a line and then press Enter t
85. in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method because styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can specify that certain paragraphs be checked in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for information on how to manage the language settings of a style You can set the language for the whole document for individual paragraphs or even for individual words and characters all from Tools gt Language on the menu bar 60 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Another way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages In the Default languages for documents section of the Options dialog you can choose a different language for all the text AB The spelling checker works only for those languages in the list that have the symbol v next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional dictionary using Tools gt Languages gt More dictionaries online The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatically For example hte will be cha
86. is used by three formulas in other cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas 94 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started C Beta 3 2000 A0 0 1000 Beta A0 1 AD 0 2880 Beta A1 1 A1 0 6562 BetatA2 1 A2 0 7219 BetatAd di A3 0 6424 BetatA4r AH 0 7351 Beta As i AS 0 6231 Beta tAS 1 A6 0 7515 BetatAr i A7 0 5975 BHeta Ae t1 Agi 0 7696 Beta tAg 1 A9 0 5675 Beta A10 1 A10 0 7854 Figure 78 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line L p X Split screen bar Figure 79 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows as in Figure 80 p Figure 80 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 3 Hold down the left mouse button A gray line appears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar Y
87. many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to apply them Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up to three criteria which are applied one after another Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the sheet Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 109 Highlight the cells to be sorted then select Data gt Sort to open the Sort dialog o
88. or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar See Moving toolbars below Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 19 Flowchart x seen D ZE onde BGoeay agel sa e oe Se XOaVaD es s Li nM B B Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats Figure 3 Example of a tear off toolbar Floating toolbars Apache OpenOffice includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating Table toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars below Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle the small vertical bar to the left of the toolbar hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 4 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Figure 5 Handles of docked toolbars 5 Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help a Baa fo SE i lm L my Default CentSchbook BT 2 Hh Figure 4 Moving a docked toolbar
89. or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the Apache OpenOffice component you are using Figure 19 shows the window for Writer with Page Styles visible 32 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctrl key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked 2 Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particular category 3 To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a character style select the characters first At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a dropdown list In Tip Figure 19 the window shows Automatic meaning the list includes only styles applied automatically by Apache OpenOffice You can choose to show all styles or other groups of styles for example only custom styles Styles and Formatting Paragraph Styles New Style from Selection Update Style Load Styles IA Character Styles Frame Styles Fill Format Mode Figure 19 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph styles Using Fill Format mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without havin
90. or sound file 1 Click the object icon for the movie or sound file in your document If the icon is arranged on the background hold down Ctrl while you click 2 The Media Playback toolbar is shown Click Play Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 73 You can also use the Media Playback toolbar to pause stop or loop as well as to adjust the volume or mute the playback of the file For movie files the toolbar also provides a slider for selecting the zoom factor for the playback Printing See Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing in this book and Chapter 5 Printing Exporting Faxing and E mailing in the Writer Guide for details on previewing pages before printing selecting print options printing in black and white on a color printer printing brochures and other printing features Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes All these facilities use a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use
91. pop up menu from the dock Parts of the main window The main window is similar in each component of Apache OpenOffice although some details vary See the chapters in this book about Writer Calc Draw and Impress for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar the standard toolbar and the formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom 18 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Menu bar The Menu bar is located across the top of the Apache OpenOffice window just below the Title bar On a Mac it is at the top of the screen in the same location as the menu bar for other programs When you choose one of the menus listed below a submenu drops down to show commands e File contains commands that apply to the entire document such as Open Save and Export as PDF e Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo xxx where xxx is the command to undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document e View contains commands for controlling the display of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout e Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture e Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoCorrect for formatting the layout of your document e Table shows all commands to insert and edit a table in a text document e Tool
92. possible For example a over b produces a fraction z You can enter a formula in three ways e Select a symbol from the Elements window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 221 G Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help D EHe DE ES 5 Elements yi agb deA Pix gt a da 3 amp a a Fa 74 a b a b axb a b arb C a b a b awb Figure 227 Equation Editor Elements window and location of resulting equation The context menu and the Elements window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol This provides a convenient way to learn the Math markup Note Click on the document body to exit the formula editor Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Elements window The simplest method for entering a formula is to use the Elements window Elements Za osb aeA fid 2a doa 8 a 4 Fa Symbols a b a b axb a b aab a b B a b a b awb Figure 228 Symbols are divided into categories 222 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started The Elements window is divided into two main parts e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols available in the current category Tip You can hide or show the Elements window with View gt El
93. properties fill color line type and weight anchoring and others of the drawing object using either the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 270 or the choices and dialogs reached by right clicking on the drawing object Set or change properties for drawing objects To set the properties for a drawing object before you draw it 1 2 3 On the Drawing toolbar Figure 269 click the Select tool On the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 270 click on the icon for each property and select the value you want for that property For more control or to define new attributes you can click on the Area or Line icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs BO MH s 0 00m os B Black 8 9 10111213 14 15 1 Line 5 Line Color 9 To Foreground 13 Alignment 2 Arrow Style 6 Area 10 To Background 14 Change Anchor 3 Line Style 7 Area Style Filling 11 Bring to Front 15 Ungroup 4 Line Width 8 Rotate 12 Send to Back 16 Group Figure 270 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 262 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started The default you set applies to the current document and session It is not retained when you close the document or close Writer and it does not apply to any other document you open The defaults apply to all the drawing objects except text objects To change the properties for an existing drawing object 1 Select the object 2 Continue as described above You can
94. recommended to use Apache OpenOffice Draw which includes many more features such as layers styles and so on Creating drawing objects To begin using the drawing tools display the Drawing toolbar Figure 269 by clicking View gt Toolbars gt Drawing If you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly you can tear off this toolbar and move it to a convenient place on the window Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 261 Fk SSE i 5 1 23 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Select 5 Freeform Line 9 Symbol Shapes 13 Stars 2 Line 6 Text 10 Block arrows 14 Points 3 Rectangle 7 Callouts 11 Flowcharts 15 Fontwork Gallery 4 Ellipse 8 Basic Shapes 12 Callouts 16 From File 17 Extrusion On Off Figure 269 The Drawing toolbar To use a drawing tool 1 2 3 4 5 Click in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored You can change the anchor later if necessary Choose the tool from the Drawing toolbar Figure 269 The mouse pointer changes to a drawing functions pointer D Move the cross hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then click and drag to create the drawing object Release the mouse button The selected drawing function remains active so you can draw another object of the same type To cancel the selected drawing function press the Esc key or click on the Select icon the arrow on the Drawing toolbar You can now change the
95. square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example to enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation 1 Open the list of data sources F4 and select the Vacations table in the Automobile database 2 Use this sentence On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name But only type On our breakfast cost paid by our lunch cost paid by and our supper cost paid by 3 To replace date click the field name Date in the data source window and drag it to the right of the word On The result On lt Date gt If you have Field shadings turned on View gt Field shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not 4 To replace first amount click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of our breakfast cost Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them Result breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt 5 To replace the first name click the BPayment field name and drag it to the right of paid by Result paid by lt BPayment gt 6 Inthe same way fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence Use lt Lunch gt and lt LPayment gt for the second set of
96. the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box above the field name for the table s ID field 2 Drop and drag the gray box for the table s ID field to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 4 Name and save the spreadsheet 5 Click a row of the table in the Data Source window 6 Drag the data in the ID field in the selected row onto the ID field in the spreadsheet The Save icon should activate 7 Click the Edit File button to make the spreadsheet read only Click Save when asked if you want to save the file 8 The Data Source window goes blank the fields in the spreadsheet are populated with data from the row you selected and the Form Navigation toolbar appears at the bottom of the spreadsheet Mi Record 2 of 2 Cu 4 gt Do Figure 196 Navigation arrows of a form 9 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Each type of field allows a different method to enter the dat
97. the Design View Queries that require calculations are best created with the Design view Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 205 Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances In the main database window Figure 163 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens Figure 199 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was bought When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the format for naming fields in a query Note is Table name field name with a period between the table name and the field name For example The Lunch field of the Vacation table used in a query has the name Vacation Lunch Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables 2 Select fields from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click Artist and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in the Query list b Move the AlbumTitle and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Click Next Tip To change the order of the fields select the fie
98. the Mac or Nautilus on Linux The appropriate component will start and the document will be loaded Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with Apache OpenOffice then when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer x1s Excel files open in Calc and ppt PowerPoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in Excel and PowerPoint files open in PowerPoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in Apache OpenOffice and save in those formats from Apache OpenOffice See Opening an existing document on page 23 for more information Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that Apache OpenOffice has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by Apache OpenOffice thus shortening the startup time for Apache OpenOffice components by about half If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter if you want to enable it Using the Quickstarter icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu Figure 2 from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existin
99. the Normal view to create it ee ey val gt t Dau ATMA y Figure 108 Text Formatting toolbar Liberation Sans Nimbus 124 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Notes view Use the Notes view Figure 109 to add notes to a slide These notes are not seen when the presentation is shown 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes s Click the slide in the Slides pane or Double click the slide s name in the Navigator 3 In the text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing Normal Qutine Notes Handout Slide Sorter rr O E a n a a a a a e aa M Click to add notes l Figure 109 Notes view You can resize the Notes text box using the colored resizing handles which appear when you click on the edge of the box You can also move the box by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide fora printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace Tasks View X then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane You can then e Master Pages choose to print 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page Use this view also to customize the information printed on the handout Refer to Chapter 10 of the Impress Guide for i
100. the Slide Show menu to change the order of the slides choose which ones are shown automate moving from one slide to the next and other settings To change the slide transition animate slides add a soundtrack to the presentation and make other enhancements you need to use functions in the Task pane See the Impress Guide for details on how to use all of these features Adding and formatting text Many of your slides are likely to contain some text This section gives you some guidelines on how to add text and how to change its appearance Text in slides is contained in text boxes For more information on adding and formatting text see Chapter 3 in the Impress Guide There are two types of text boxes that you can add to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and do not select any special contents type These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool T in the Drawing toolbar or the Text toolbar Using text boxes created from the Layout pane Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text 2 Type or paste your text in the text box These text boxes are known as AutoLayout text boxes Using text boxes created from the text tool Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click on the Text icon I on the Drawing toolbar or press F2 If the Drawing toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars
101. the original table naming each according to the type of music contained in it 1 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables 2 Right click on the CD Collection table icon Choose Copy from the pop up menu 3 Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste The Copy table dialog opens 4 Change the table name to Pop and click Next 5 Click the gt gt button to move all the fields from the left box to the right box and click Next 6 Since all the fields already have the proper Field type no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make any changes if they are needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them should be very limited Fields can be added or deleted but adding a field requires taking the time to enter the data for that one field for every record having Caution an entry for that field Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the A field type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before you add any data Deleting a table removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table Creating tables in Design
102. the report below open the fuel economy query created A in the previous section For the End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer column change the number 1 to the number 3 The report will be identical before and after you make the change All reports are based upon a single table or query So you need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query For example a report on vacation expenses includes both fuel costs and meal costs These values are contained in fields of two different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires creating a query Creating a static report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report e How do we want the information arranged e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch Supper snacks and fuel One possible report would simply list the totals of each of these expense groups Another possible report would list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third poss
103. the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab or click the left arrow In the AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on As a consequence a change in the level also produces other changes for example font size bullet type and so on Do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then clicking the Note desired outline style as you would in Writer Due to the way that presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 137 Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that the colored resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullets and Numbering icon st on the text formatting toolbar 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics P
104. the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence Add Commands A Cx To add a command to a menu select the category and then the command You can also drag the command to the Commands list of the Menus tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands About OpenOffice org Add Templates AutoPilot Address Data Sou View AutoPilot Presentation levse Edit Bibliography Database Options Create HTML Docurnent BASIC Create Master Document i Insert Edit Macros Documents si Exit aa Extended Tips Controls i Help Table Help Agent Drawing Ps ed A 4 MW 4 Th Description Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights Figure 308 Adding a command to a menu Modifying menu entries In addition to changing the sequence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add submenus rename or delete the entries and add group separators To begin select the menu or submenu in the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked
105. to do if you have end of paragraph markers visible Choose View gt Nonprinting Characters to turn them on 1 2 3 Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there Press the Enter key to move the cursor down to the space between the Date field and the Breakfast field Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 195 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 an Default Figure 185 Apply Styles list Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start Type the heading Meals Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of snack area Type the heading Snacks Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting window Note using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings See Chapter 6 of the Writer Guide for details Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the ba
106. toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org This section describes how to create new toolbars and add other icons commands to the list of those available on a toolbar Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 293 To get to the toolbar customization dialog do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and pick the Toolbars page Figure 309 To customize toolbars 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 Inthe section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOrrice arg Writer Toolbars Load URL Toolbar Content Commands lt E a Frit File save In Cpenorfice org Writer kad Description iv iv T v v iv E Creates a new Openoffice org
107. using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 50 You can move items up or down the list or create sub points and even change the style of bullets Use View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Bullets and Numbering x i a o Il 1 Bullets On Off 6 Promote One Level with 10 Move Down 2 Numbering On Off Subpoints 11 Move Up with Subpoints 3 Numbering Off 7 Demote One Level with 12 Move Down with Subpoints Subpoints 4 Promote One Level 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry 13 Restart Numbering 5 Demote One Level 9 Move Up 14 Bullets and Numbering Figure 50 Bullets and Numbering toolbar If numbering or bullets are being applied automatically in a way that you find inappropriate you can switch them off temporarily by unchecking Format gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing 64 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Hyphenating words You have several choices regarding hyphenation let Writer do it automatically using its hyphenation dictionaries insert conditional hyphens manually where necessary or don t hyphenate at all Automatic hyphenation To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off Styles and Formatting 1 Press F11 T on Mac to open the Styles aon E and Formatting window 2 On the Paragraph
108. version 2 0 OpenOffice org has supported the open standard OASIS OpenDocument as its default file format On January 26 2010 Oracle Corporation acquired Sun Microsystems In June 2011 Oracle contributed the OpenOffice org source code to the Apache Software Foundation using the Apache Software Grant Agreement SGA This SGA permits the Apache OpenOffice Project Management Committee to re license the OpenOffice source code under the Apache 2 0 license Oracle also transferred to Apache the trademarks and domain names owned by them and associated with the project After extensive community discussion and comment the OpenOffice project voted to change the name from OpenOffice org to Apache OpenOffice The new license the Apache License 2 0 is compatible with the GNU GPLv3 and with the GNU LGPLv3 the previous license as well as MPLv2 the new Mozilla license The Apache OpenOffice community Work on Apache OpenOffice is performed by a diverse group of volunteers from over a dozen countries These volunteers work on coding testing documentation websites translations marketing as well as other functions The Apache OpenOffice community invites contributors Whatever you do best you can do it for Apache OpenOffice Chapter 12 Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 303 What is open source The four essential rights of open source software are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GP
109. with a varying degree of transparency as a gradient Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the same area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more information about styles see Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates in this book Special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects This section describes a few of these effects More effects include distorting shadows and transparency can be found in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide 166 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon Bo You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be flipped around this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the orientation of the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dashed until the mouse is released Note If you hold down the Shift key while moving the line the line will rotate in 45 degree increments Mirror copies Move the axis of symmetry to the desired location of the mirror axis Copy the objec
110. 108 connectors 159 content boxes Impress 132 C context menu 165 Calc context menus 21 AutoFormat 106 conversion 170 editing data 101 copy and paste 55 Enter key use of 86 copying object from Gallery 256 features 79 create document from template 39 filtering visible cells 109 creating a document 23 formula bar 81 cross fading 168 Function Wizard 81 cross references hiding and showing data 108 Inserting references 6 Navigator 85 overview 6 outline group controls 108 CSV file printing 111 open 83 Sheet tabs 81 save 84 CSV files 82 84 Index 309 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks 280 curves Draw 159 custom dictionary 289 customizing keyboard shortcuts 297 menus 290 toolbars 293 cut and paste 55 D dashes 58 data editing Calc changing data in acell 102 removing data from a cell 101 replacing all data ina cell 102 data entry Calc dates and times 97 fill series 99 Fill tool 98 numbers 96 numbers as text 97 selection lists 101 speeding up 98 text 97 validating cell contents 101 data source description 173 editing 200 linking 199 registering 199 using in OOo documents 200 viewing 200 data validity 101 database AutoValue 180 creating 175 creating tables 176 field types and formats 177 list table 183 planning 174 primary key 176 178 180 registering 199 Report Wizard 214 Table Wizard 176 tables 176 database form activation order 198 background 196 creating in Design View 198 creating using a Wiza
111. 3 Browse to where the database is located 4 Make sure the registered name is correct 5 Click OK Using data sources in Apache OpenOffice Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other AOO components including Writer and Calc Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 199 Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered such as the Automobile database created earlier in this chapter To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name see Figure 191 This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it El Automobile Lg Queries Tables Figure 191 Databases Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new re
112. 3 Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this example we have chosen Ctrl 9 4 In the Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the expansion symbol usually a sign or triangle to expand the list of styles 5 Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of AOO s predefined Styles 298 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 6 To assign Ctr 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 1 in the Function list and then click Modify Ctr 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctr 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top 7 Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard shortcuts to a file 1 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button at the right of the Customize dialog Figure 313 2 Inthe Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select All files from the Save as Type list 3 Next enter a name
113. 3 newline y A 1 y How do add limits to my sum integral The sum and int commands can optionally take the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Limits for integrals are usually treated as subscripts and superscripts Markup Result sum from k 1 tonak Ya k 1 int from to x f t dt or J rdt or f fedt int_04x f t dt Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 229 Markup Result int from Re f J f R sum to infinity 24 n a Note For more details on integrals and sums see the Math Guide Brackets with matrices look ugly For background we start with an overview of the matrix command Markup Result a b c d matrix a b c d Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated by Note ae The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix Markup Result ee c d matrix a b c d _ Math provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands eft and right to make scalable brackets Markup Result a b c d left matrix a b c d right Tip Use eft and right to obtain square brackets How do I make a derivative Making derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell Math it s a fraction In other word
114. 5c cecseccgsaniastobepnaenannsadaneuy ie anuueatteasanpenarsoeannmaneeianieuasaraauenceneeseeraeeees 120 Workspace a septa ne ai ad asta tnacebas ceseencacieceomnsimece DAA i DE NERE EADAE Ena 124 Creating a new FSO acticin ceeccnecicncenccconcassrecineisade chose censwesienenemenisedesouseceenarteeeearntesenrens 128 Formatmno A pec p i a i ninn EEEE EE ee ee et rt eee een ete eer 130 Andino and Orman E ee N r eri 134 Adding pictures tables charts media files and other objectS s nenennennsnenrnrrsrerrsrerrsresrne 138 Working with master pages and SINGS scsicee si caccceceretccseciauaddcadseeadteraceecniuandsgasconianeneredbesaietinsedie 141 Adding comments to a PreS ntatiOn c ccccccccececececeeeceeccececeecceeeseceeesaueceeesasesaeesesesasesaeees 146 Setting up the SS Wo rete waco ete con endtwn nic cecaedescecauscnccbansuiucieatsveeaescmbins ad eansecbnaawsensseuseenenen 147 PERI WPI RU SIN EE E EE E 148 Chapter 6 SCULING SIAM WILT DE AW viscssacisnsedensssndseseecansdnesiaushetisacadenspesinensiesssetacsedsseuassuctivaseatescaseusscavanss 149 RT E cg sec ecco ene ees O 149 Pans Or a main Oran WNO earen e E aN 149 choosing and delning Colls ears ta ar cet ascecsc priacesers aein du ems vata Aa EETA EENS 152 Positioning objects with snap FUNCTIONS ccc cece cecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseesenesaess 153 Positioning objects with guiding NAGS occa cceccrncctivacussesnsneuneecttesadioreenisauress
115. 72 Adding tables spreadsheets And Chalrts ccccscccssecsseceeceeceeeceueeeueeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeesaess 72 AGNO a MOVE O SOUNA an een eee ee er ee en a rT 73 BBN sarees stuns crt sees Bradt ge dtm hiner Se Scent E EON EE AI eee ce NA E EE E E A T 74 Beann e E E e A E ET EE E AEE E E E AT 74 fyi eee relator Me ole 8 i eae inre Ena EDEB 74 SO A aE E ieenace a AEEA E 15 LINKING to another part of a CO CUMIN isn cccsccesacecrarecsprecsancequsstaeseieaiaccastacsnanteenenenrsentadnescaacss rates 79 Using master COC UNMIG ING winesccsntnccntes cic croctahrcncecedeaseacaocdanedasndamsinshd cnoemalenddonbnalcenononhopinenmencmecediencxs 78 creating TA TONM sects epics acre eie EE oer eerie A EEEN pee eles 78 Chapter 4 MII SAP IR GG sssrinds nsan aaea NESSER ai 79 E a Get cee ae eee E 79 PE CSCS Si and COS recreate Dec eae eed EE TEE ENEN 79 Parts of the main Cale WINdOW ce etecita se nics cnc cote eds danin ieia aaa Eai 79 Opening and saving CSV MSS osx cercasenissdecs cn usedorciatdecesd dedbssndeassnecene Geaseuacednecentdasssdasuosducndepdeuene ese 82 Navigating within spreadsheets nannannnnnaannnesnnnrnrrnrnorrrnrrnrnnrrrrrnrrnernrrnrrnrrnrsnrnrennernrnnrnrennee 84 Selecting items in a sheet or SPreAdSNee ccccccceeccseecececeeeceeeceeeceeceeecaeeceeseeeseeessanssansnass 88 Working win Ne CMMI Ny and See cop cee eis tes eadeeemms one nee aAA DEA a eaei 90 re 4 908 i RE lt 1 clo eee eee ne ene
116. A beta BETA gt B gamma gt y GAMMA gt T psi gt y PSI gt Y phi gt amp PHI gt theta gt THETA gt Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the Symbols catalog window Choose Tools gt Catalog Under Symbol set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list The markup name of the character is shown below the list window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 225 Symbol set Figure 233 Symbols catalog used for entering Greek characters and some special symbols Example 2 x 3 14159 For this example we will suppose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek character m Step 2 Open the Elements window View gt Elements Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the Relations button If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 234 Figure 235 shows the Elements window after clicking the Relations button The symbol we want is circled Elements Malo aeA f x da i FReiatons 4 t 4 74 Elements K fi Za i a 3 A a b azb asb alb afb a b a b axb a b aab arb d palt ul asb a b avb gee aea mele azb deb asb Figure 234 Tooltip indicates the deb a
117. Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Help Tips When Tips is active one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer over an icon or field without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips is active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer over that item Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default behavior click Reset Help Agent Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability To display Help in high contrast if your computer s operating system supports this choose one of the high contrast style sheets from the pull down list High contrast style Visual effect Default Black text on white background High Contrast 1 Yellow text on black background High Contrast 2 Green text on black background High Contrast Black White text on black background High Contrast White Black text on white background Open Save dialogs To use the standard Open and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with OpenOffice org will be used See Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice for more about the AOO Open and Save dialogs This book uses the AOO Ope
118. B x amp bee pe B ict 5 35 2 03 125 0 00 x 0 00 Slide 1 1 Default Oo e G 41 Figure 130 Initial Draw window Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand side of the workspace The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page see the gray double lines highlighted in Figure 131 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing objects more accurately You can also use the rulers to manage object Figure 131 Rulers show the size of the handles and guide lines making it easier to selected object position objects The page margins in the Sc E e AE e E drawing area are also represented on the i Milimeter rulers You can change the margins directly on Centimeter the rulers by dragging them with the mouse Meter To modify the unit of measurement of a ruler right click on the ruler and select one of the measurement units The two rulers can have me different units ane Point Pica Figure 132 Ruler units 150 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Status bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen in all Apache OpenOffice components it includes several Draw specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Draw in the Draw Guide The sizes are given
119. Caution Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of Apache OpenOffice s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the styles are not in use If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens 2 Inthe box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears in the center box Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 39 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box 4 Select the template that you want to use You can preview the selected template or view the template s properties E e To preview the template click the Preview icon appears in the box on the right A preview of the template e To view the template s properties click the Docume
120. Closing a document to save or discard your changes Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To view or change which type of dialog OpenOffice org uses 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General 2 Select the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option This section discusses the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs Figure 14 shows the Save As dialog the Open dialog is similar The three buttons in the top right of the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs are from left to right e Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy Click and hold this button for a second to drop down a list of higher level folders to go to one of the folders on the list move the mouse pointer over its name and release the mouse button e Create New Folder e Default Directory For documents in OpenDocument format that have been saved with more than one version use the Version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved The Read only option on the Open dialog opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is disp
121. DF icon to export the entire document using your default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Select the appropriate settings and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options Range section e All Exports the entire document to PDF e Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 e Selection Exports all the selected material 242 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started PDF Options Selection Images Lossless compression JPEG compression Quality Reduce Image resolution General F PDF A 1a C Tagged PDF Create PDF form
122. Default is blank and the rest have background and styled text i Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window where you can modify the Tip styles used in any slide master to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout The layouts included in Impress are shown here You can choose the one you want and use it as it is or you can modify it to meet your own requirements However it is not possible to save custom layouts Table Design The standard table styles are provided in this section You can further modify the appearance of a table with the options to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations can be used to emphasize or enhance different elements of each slide The Custom Animation section provides an easy way to add change or remove animations Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 121 Slide Transition The Slide Transition section provides access to a number of slide transition options The default is set to No Transition in which the following slide simply replaces the existing one However many additional transitions are available You can also specify the transition speed slow medium fast choose between an automatic or manual transition and choose how long the selected slide should be shown automatic transition only Workspace The Workspace normally in the center has five tabs Normal Outline N
123. Deleting a template folder You cannot delete template folders supplied with Apache OpenOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 45 To delete a template folder that you have created 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source folder this action copies the template instead of moving it Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with Apache OpenOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported To delete a template 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to delete A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to delete
124. Draw also provides tools for aligning multiple objects details are given in the Draw Guide Selecting several objects To select or deselect several objects one by one press the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click on the same object deselects it 162 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The dynamic method described here uses the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the left hand area of the status bar at the bottom of the Draw window This area shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation This information changes when the mouse is moved Dynamic movement of objects To move an object select it and then click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse During movement the shape of the object appears a faded version of the shape to help with repositioning To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button The new position appears immediately in the Status Bar Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of a selected object or group of selected objects with the mouse move one of the handles located around the selection As shown in the following illustration a faded version of the new object shap
125. Erom 5 Send documents Figure 262 Sending a document as an email message Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 251 Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key also known as a certificate A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret anda public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of OpenOffice org the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderb
126. L e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the source code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http www opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What are open standards An open standard provides a means of doing something that is independent of manufacturer or vendor thus enabling competing software programs to freely use the same file formats HTML XML and ODF are examples of open standards for documents An open standard meets the following requirements e It is well documented with the complete specification publically available either free or ata nominal charge e It can be freely copied distributed and used The intellectual property of the standard is made irrevocably available on a royalty free basis e It is standardized and maintained in an independent open forum also called standards organization using an open process What is OpenDocument OpenDocument ODF is an X
127. ML based file format for office documents text documents spreadsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS http www oasis open org who an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied to a specific office suite and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on a particular software supplier Apache OpenOffice by default saves documents in Open Document Format Apache OpenOffice has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard Apache OpenOffice can also open and save many other file formats see Error Reference source not found on page Error Reference source not found Error Reference source not found on page Error Reference source not found and Error Reference source not found on page Error Reference source not found 304 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started OpenDocument filename extensions The most common filename extensions used for OpenDocument documents are odt for word processing text documents ods for spreadsheets odp for presentations odb for databases odg for graphics vector drawings odf for formulas mathematical equati
128. O components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 156 shows part of this window Create Table in Design View Description Use Wizard to Create Table f Create View Reports Figure 156 Creating database tables i Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile OpenOffice org Tip Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always lt database name gt OpenOffice org Base Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 175 Caution As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than just saving what you have just created You must save the whole database as well A For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it When the table is first saved it is also made part of the database Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or press Alt a The three tasks that you can perform on a table are in the Tasks list see Figure 156 Using the Wizard to create a ta
129. OpenOffice org in the Help for other requirements and information Select or deselect the options as required Miscellaneous options Support assistive technology tools program restart required Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics M Allow animated text Help tips disappear after 4 seconds Options for high contrast appearance W Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system Use automatic font color for screen display Use system colors for page previews Figure 292 Choosing accessibility options Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install OpenOffice org or if you have more than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the OpenOffice org Java options page to choose the JRE for AOO to use If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while AOO searches for JREs on the hard disk If AOO finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can then select the Use a Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed
130. Slides button to apply the same display time to all slides To apply a different display time to each slide in your presentation choose Slide Show gt Rehearse Timings Start the slide show and a small timer is displayed in the bottom left corner When you are ready to advance to the next slide mouse click on the display background or press the right arrow on your keyboard Impress will memorize the timings for each slide and advance to the slide automatically after each timing ends when you run the slide show To automatically restart a slide show after the last slide has been displayed go to Slide Show gt Slide Show Settings on the menu bar Select Auto and the timing of the pause between slide shows Click OK when you have finished Running a slide show To run a slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show gt Slide Show on the menu bar e Click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar e Press F5 on the keyboard If the slide transition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the slides and set other optio
131. Slides option b Enter the number of the slides to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of a slide or a selection from multiple slides 1 In the document select the section of the slide to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Select the Selection option in the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog 4 Click the Print button Printing handouts notes or outlines in Impress Handouts prints the slides in reduced size on the page from one to nine slides per page The slides can be printed horizontally landscape orientation or vertically portrait orientation on the page Notes prints a single slide per page with any notes entered for that slide in Notes View Outline prints the title and headings of each slide in outline format To print handouts notes or outlines 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Inthe Print section of the Print dialog select the required option 3 For Handouts you can then choose how many slides to print per page and the order in which they are printed 4 Click the Print button Range and copies All slides Number of copies 1 Slides 1 5 E f Selection Collate roe roe Print Slides per page Default v Order Left to right then down v Printing a brochure In Writer Impress and Draw you can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages
132. Standards OPENDOCUMENL ccscceescesecseeseeeseeeseeesenssenssenesenenenenenenenes 303 UE OCU TCI E E E E T S E A EO E 303 A short history of Apache OpenOffiCe cccccccecccseeceeeceeeceeeceeceueceueceueceuecaeesaeeseeesaeesaeesaes 303 6 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started The Apache OpenOffice COMMUNIY ccccccecccecceeceecceeeceeseeeceeseeceseceeseeeceesaeeseesenscesseeeseees 303 ees ONG SOUP Cee er E A E AT ES 304 What are open standaldS 2s iacepineametuianetontmaineneane sina nab T EEA EEA EE STERR RENNE 304 Wat ie Oe ere res cca sinananncin vara munenednaasieget peaandaiensiinyaresiniwiepeutaiaeeainaesentonrmastiqnanl 304 File formats Apache OpenOffice CAN OPEN ccccccseccsecceeceeceecaeecaeeceeeceeeceeesueeseesseesseeens 305 File formats Apache OpenOffice can save 0 srsice ds cence ceceaxcnsccseasuescniedexcenecanistiaxqnaztecewarecsonaseecers 306 Expono O UNE TONA resne E E S 308 aa e E E E E E L A EE E E E A E A A E EE 309 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 7 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Preface Who ts this book for Anyone who wants to get up to speed quickly with Apache OpenOffice will find this book valuable You may be new to office software or you may be familiar with another office suite What s tn this book This book introduces the main components of Apache OpenOffice e Writer word processing e Calc Spreadsheets
133. Styles page Figure 51 right click on Default and select Modify 3 On the Paragraph Style dialog Figure 52 Complimentary close he Text Flow Heading go to the Text page Heading 1 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Heading 10 Automatically option Click OK to save Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Paragraph Style Default Mumbering Tabs Drop Caps Background Borders Organizer Indents amp Spacing Aligament Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation Aal Characters at line end i Characters at line begin Ae Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Figure 52 Turning on automatic hyphenation Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that Note hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected See Chapter 2 Styles and Templates for more about styles based on other styles You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to find the hyphenation settings Options f Minimum number of characters for hy Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 Hyphenate without inquiry Hyphenate special regions Figure 53 Setting hyphenation
134. Table Vacations Available fields Fields in report Odometer BPayment LPayment oPayment onackNoa Breakfast onPayment Lunch Supper MiscNotes onackCost A y MiscPayment Figure 217 Adding fields to a report Step 2 Labeling fields Change any field labels you wish We will shorten Miscellaneous to Misc Click Next Step 3 Grouping Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Figure 218 Selecting fields for grouping data Step 4 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next 214 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 5 Choose layout We will be using the default settings for the layout Click Next Step 6 Create report Label the report Vacation Expenses e Select Static report Click Finish If you feel adventurous try selecting some of the other layout choices After Note selecting a choice drag the Report Wizard window out of the way so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Title Bar of the window and then drag and drop Vacation fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables on page 208 to add the Fuel table c Inthe Fuel table double click Date and FuelCost to en
135. Taming Apache OpenOffice Version 3 4 Getting Started Copyright This document is Copyright 2013 by Jean Hollis Weber You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution License version 3 0 or later http creativecommons org licenses by 3 0 Apache Apache OpenOffice and OpenOffice org are trademarks of the Apache Software Foundation Used with permission No endorsement by The Apache Software Foundation is implied by the use of these marks All other trademarks mentioned in this guide belong to their respective owners Acknowledgements This book is based on an earlier draft written by volunteers from the ODFAuthors and Apache OpenOffice communities and on Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 with additional material adapted from Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 4 The contributors to those books are listed on page 14 Publication date and software version Published 10 May 2013 Based on Apache OpenOffice 3 4 1 Publisher Friends of OpenDocument Inc 544 60 Beck Drive North Condon QLD 4815 Australia http friendsofopendocument com ISBN 978 1 921320 32 3 Contents S EELT E POA A A I E SE coe wc AS ecu asc aei A ses ET ENEA E A ues enna T 9 e a O T a R EA EEA 9 e A DOO Ea A ATEEN EEEE EE EEE 9 Where to get more Mel Disiciisisesssimecctarinanrstsncrnanadesosnheaneabanetddsanseatecawnisiianeaandinidenateihaaseinbiasdeainennins 9 What s new in Apache OpenOffice 3 4
136. View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table in which you directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database Note While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD field a Type FuellD as the first Field Name Press the Tab key to move to the Field Type column Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 179 b Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR A shortcut for selecting from the Field Type dropdown list press the key for the Tip first letter of the choice You can cycle through the choices for a given letter by repeatedly pressing that key c Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes d Set FuellD as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of Fuel D Figure 159 and choose Primary Key from the menu This places a key icon in front of Fuel D FieldName Field Type og FuellD Integer INTEGER p Cut Copy Delete Insert Rows Description Primary Key Field Properties AutoValue Auto increment state IDENTITY Length lo Format example OO i Figure 159 D
137. Writer to combine the two files and show the differences Choose Edit gt Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Choose Edit gt Changes gt Record Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Right click on an individual change and choose Accept Change or Reject Change from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Changes gt Accept or Reject to view the list of changes and accept or reject them Details are in the Writer Guide f Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab stop from align left to Tip align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded 74 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of la
138. a In many if not all cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window Figure 163 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 203 The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Then click the day the you want Then press the Tab key to go to the Odometer field q September 2008 p SMTWTFS 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today None Figure 197 Calendar dropdown The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields are numerical fields Enter values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value is entered use the Tab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a dropdown list If as in my case all of the elements of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired entry e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle throu
139. a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line The methods for switching between bulleted and numbered lists are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 138 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line To switch off Tip bullets altogether click the bullets button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Text Formatting on the menu bar Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button on the text formatting toolbar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list Methods for changing the appearance of the list are explained on page 138 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab or click the indentation arrows aan in the text formatting toolbar Each time you press Tab or click the right arrow the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at
140. a new object subsequent un combining in the same manner as ungrouping is not possible Select a collection of objects then right click and choose Combine from the pop up menu After you have selected more than one object the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions can be reached in the Modify gt Shapes menu or though the group s right click menu under the heading Shapes Aids for positioning objects Draw has various tools to help you arrange the objects with respect to each other e Moving an object to the front or to the back e Aligning objects with respect to each other e Distributing the distance and space between objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information Inserting and editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing raster graphics bitmaps for example photos and scanned images including import and and export as well as conversion from one format to another Draw can read in all the usual range of graphic file formats You can add pictures from several sources e The Gallery see Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book e Directly from a scanner Insert gt Picture gt Scan e Images created by another program including photographs from a digitial camera Insert gt Picture gt From File Draw provides tools for working with bitmap images the Picture toolbar and the bitmap image management palette However it does not hav
141. a slide using Slide Sorter To move a slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide and the slide is highlighted see Figure 112 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want Selecting and moving groups of slides To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctrl key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Control key select the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key select the final Slide in the group This selects all of the other slides between the first and the last e Use the mouse Click slightly to one side left or right of the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer until all of the slides you want selected are highlighted To move a group of slides 1 Select a group of slides 2 Drag and drop the group to their new location Working in Slide Sorter view You can work with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and choose any of the following from the pop up menu e Add anew slide after the selected slide e Delete Slide deletes the selected slide e Rename Slide allows you to rename the selected slide e Slide Layout allows you to change the layout of the selected slide e Slide Transition allows you to change the transition of the selected slide For one slide click the slide to select i
142. a very strong encryption mechanism that makes it almost impossible to recover the contents of a document if you lose the password 24 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started File encryption password Enter password to open A Confirm password Note After a password has been set the document will only open with the password Should you lose the password there will be no way to recover the document Please also note that this password is case sensitive More Options UR Cancel Figure 12 Entering a password for a document Writer and Calc provide a second level of protection which allows a file to be viewed but not changed without a password that is the file opens in read only mode To protect a document from being changed 1 Choose More Options from the Set Password dialog 2 Enter the password in the Enter password to allow editing field Repeat the password in the Confirm password field Click OK Saving a document automatically You can choose to have Apache OpenOffice save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and set the time interval Closing a document To close a document choose File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window
143. able and its number but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on Click Insert 76 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Fields Cross references Set Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Figure Bookmarks Functions Doclnformation Selection The Writer interface Status bar Changing document views Moving quickly through a document Working with documents Saving as a Microsoft Word file Working with text Selecting items that are not consecutive Insert reference to Name Working with documents Value Number no context Number full context Figure 58 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks and create hyperlinks to bookmarks as described above 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert gt Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK Insert Bookmark EW Bookmarks insertpagenum usedocproperties Figure 59 Inserting a bookmark Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer A Usin
144. able in several languages After you have installed this extension you will find the templates under File gt New gt Templates and Documents Template Changer for Writer Adds two new items to the File gt Templates menu in Writer that allow you to assign a new template to the current document or to a folder of documents All styles and formatting will be loaded from that template and the document will behave as it was created using that template DataPilot Tools for Calc Adds some utility functions that make using the Calc DataPilot easier Display the current source range for a DataPilot Change the source range for a DataPilot Refresh all DataPilots on the current sheet Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 301 302 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 12 Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument Introduction Apache OpenOffice is both a product and an open source project If you are new to Apache OpenOffice its open source development and the community that produces and supports it you should read this appendix A short history of Apache OpenOffice The OpenOffice org project began when Sun Microsystems released the source code for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 Major updates to OpenOffice org included version 2 0 in October 2005 and version 3 0 in October 2008 Since
145. abs and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetX where X is a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can e Enter the name in the Name box when you create the sheet or e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Rename Sheet from the pop up menu replace the existing name with a better one e Double click on a sheet tab to pop up the Rename Sheet dialog Sheet names must start with either a letter or a number Apart from the first Note character of the sheet name allowed characters are letters numbers spaces and the underline character Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice in this book Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 77 shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C and H denot
146. aced in relationship with each other The four choices from left to right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Blocks Labels Above 1 Arrangement of the main form Click the second icon Columnar Labels on top The It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both tables both their field types are Date DATE Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must be met for the form to work No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuellD cannot be Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type One of the fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date would have to be used labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform Click the third icon As Data Sheet The labels are column headings and the field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next Arrange the controls on your form Arrangement of the main form Cc C4 n G a CAC As Data Sheet Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 187 Step 6 Se
147. age map to a file then click the X in the upper right corner to close the dialog 8 OO ImageMap Editor VBE tiers i ve 7or Address http odfauthors org english m Text Go to English section of ODFAuthors website Frame self Italiano Deutsch x OOFAuthors sPa ol Portugu s Fran ais Nederlands H ee EA http odfauthors org english 0 00 0 00 B 76 x 3 84 Figure 268 The dialog to create or edit an image map The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined A hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape 260 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools e Apply button click this button to apply the changes e Load Save and Select icons e Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar e Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape ofa polygon hotspot Choose the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools e Active icon toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive e Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink e Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot e Address the address pointed to by the hyperlink You can als
148. ages to print T a gt In the Ranges and copes section of the General page select the Pages option T b Enter the sequence numbers of the pages to print for example 1 4 or 1 35 7 11 1 J Click the Print button T Printing a selection of text Dj In the document select th 2 Chocee File Print from J3 The Ranges and copes 4 gt Click the Print button T Print 210mm A4 Lexmark E232 MS Microsoft XPS Document Writer Details Range and copies All pages eae pore roges Selection X Collate Sa Sa Print in reverse page order Print Comments None document only r1 4 gt Figure 248 Printing a selection of text Calc You can choose single sheets multiple sheets and selections of cells for printing Range and copies All sheets Number of copies ft Z Selected sheets a Selected cells Collate Ay AA Thereof print All pages Pages 2 3 Figure 249 Choosing what to print in Calc Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 237 Printing an individual sheet 1 In the spreadsheet click on the sheet tab to select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a range of sheets 1 Inthe spreadsheet select the sheets to print a Select the first sheet b Hold down the Control key c Click on the additiona
149. alled an oval or a circle use the Ellipse icon from the Drawing toolbar A circle is simply an ellipse with both axes the same length The ellipse drawn is the largest ellipse that fits inside the imaginary rectangle drawn with the mouse Figure 144 Drawing an ellipse Here are some other ways to draw an ellipse or circle e To draw a circle hold down the Shift key while dragging the mouse Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 157 e To draw an ellipse with the starting point at the center instead of the corner hold down the Alt key while dragging the mouse e To draw a circle with the starting point at the center hold down both the Alt and Shift keys while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse or circle that snaps to the nearest grid points hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse If you first press and hold down the Ctrl key and then click on one of the icons for Note Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text a standard sized object is drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired Drawing curves The tools for drawing curves or polygons are on the toolbar that appears when you click arrow next to the Curve icon onthe Drawing toolbar This toolbar contains eight tools See Figure 145 If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function Note Hovering the mo
150. an contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 47 Different headers on right and left pages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pages mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header ona page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text from one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appear in the contents list then use Tools gt Outline Numbering to tell Write
151. and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog See Chapter 11 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings Such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one Resetting the default template To re enable Apache OpenOffice s Default template for a document type as the default 1 Inthe Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from Apache OpenOffice s Default template for that document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you are working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 42 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles from a different template as described on page 38 the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this method What you need to do is associate t
152. and its alias are the same The FROM command requires the name of the table which contains the field Single word table names do not require quotation marks but multiple word table names do Repeat these steps for the payment fields for Lunch Supper Motel Snacks and Misc The main form should look like Figure 182 as far as where the controls are located It also shows what the Note control should look like Those changes are explained in the next step Close the Properties window Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 193 Figure 182 Position of controls in main form Step 7 Change the Misc Notes field We want the Misc Notes control which has a field type of Memo to have a vertical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Control click the Misc Notes field The green handles should surround the field but not its label 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 183 3 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list 4 Close the Properties window 5 Lengthen the Misc Notes field by moving the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the field and dragging down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches None Horizontal Password character Hide selection Additional information oo eee Hale URL ioc Figure 183 Scrollbar selections in the Properties window
153. another palette click on the Load Color List button circled The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard Apache OpenOffice palettes files with the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is particularly adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black and RGB Red Green Blue Click on the Edit button to open the Color dialog where you can set individual colors See Color options in Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice in this book Many more input possibilities are available in this dialog For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide 152 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 0 Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Name Buea SSOSOCSCSCS Color Blue 8 Table standard OK Cancel Che Bese Figure 136 Changing the color palette Positioning objects with snap functions In Draw objects can be accurately and consistently positioned using grid points special snap
154. ant to use is at the ending odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query Fuel End Reading or 7 FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity Cae hi a evti Figure 207 Tables in this query 1 Double click Fue Quantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table IFuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Fuel x x x Figure 208 Added fields to the query Step 8 Enter the FuellD difference field We want the difference between the FuellD value of the Fuel table and FuellD value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column 210 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Table End Reading End Reading Fuel Function Figure 209 Typing in calculation of fields 2 Calculate the distance traveled e Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer o Figure 210 Field for distance traveled calculations x
155. appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This dot may be O along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog 268 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice Choosing Options to Suit the Way You Work Choosing options for all of Apache OpenOffice This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of Apache OpenOffice For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box of the Options OpenOffice org dialog varies depending on which component is open The illustrations in this chapter show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the marker or triangle by OpenOffice org on the left hand side A list of pages drops down Selecting an item in the list causes the right hand side of the dialog to display the relevant page
156. are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose appropriate margins font sizes and so on You may need to experiment Tip To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Choose File gt Print 2 Inthe Print dialog click Properties Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 239 3 Check the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures Click OK to return to the Print dialog 4 Select the Page ayout tab in the Print dialog 5 Select the Brochure option 6 Inthe Page sides section select Back sides left pages option from the Include drop down list General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout DPagespershet fp 297mm A4 Order left to right then down 1 Palmi ee en aca ee ls real Draw a border around each page Brochure Camara Thrdbey Cyprian oor Cad bey 210mm Page sides Back sides left pages Front sides right pages 7 Click the Print button 8 Take the printed pages out of the printer turn the pages over and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what th
157. artedWithWrit Figure 57 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator Using cross references If you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps in a procedure You can also create your own reference items see Setting References in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for instructions To insert a cross reference to a heading figure bookmark or other item 1 In your document place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 Ifthe Fields dialog is not open click Insert gt Cross reference On the Cross references 3 tab in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references Click on the required item in the Selection list which shows all the items of the selected type In the Format list choose the format required Usually this will be Reference to insert the full text of the heading or caption Category and Number to insert the word Figure or T
158. ata at the bottom of the dialog Right click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not in the Text delimiter list click in the box and type the character 6 Click OK to open the file 5 Text Import sample csv Import Character set Unicode UTF 8 w Language Default English Australia From row Separator options Fixed width Separated by E Tab C a E Other Semicolon O Merge delimiters Text delimiter o W Other options Quoted field as text E Detect special numbers Fields Column type a a a surname Cees oe a a ae a gt eber Jean PO Box 640 Airlie Beach QLD 4802 Australia Figure 66 Text Import dialog with Comma selected as the separator and double quotation mark as the text delimiter Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 83 Saving as a CSV file To save a spreadsheet as a comma separate value CSV file 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 Inthe File name box type a name for the file 3 Inthe File type list select Text CSV csv and click Save You may see the message box shown below Click Keep Current Format This document may contain Formatting or content that cannot be sawed in the Text CSV File Format Do you want bo save the document in this Format anyway Use the latest ODF file Format and be sure all Formatting and content is saved correctly aa e in ODF Format sk when not savin
159. ate or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 Inthe Styles and Formatting window long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 21 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 25 find and select the template you want to copy styles from 38 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Load Styles Categories Templates Test Drawing HE Systems phb Help Presentation Presentation Backgrounds Presentations US Sizes Text d Frame d Pages Fi Numbering d Overwrite From File Figure 25 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any styles of the same names in the document you are copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen Note To copy the styles from another document click the From File button to open a window from which you can select the required document If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom styles for headings the heading levels associated with outline levels in Tools gt Outline Numbering will revert to the defaults of Heading 1 Heading 2 and A so on when you load styles this way You will need to change these back to your custom heading styles This is a bug
160. ation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want e Open existing presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want 2 Click Next Figure 115 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selected Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From template an example slide is shown in the Preview box 128 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started x Presentation Wizard Select a slide design 7 AA_ lt gt Presentation Backgrounds lt Original gt Black and White Blue Border Blue Lines and Gradients Dhia Clean Prsadianke gt B Select an output medium Original Screen Overhead sheet Slide Preview Paper Figure 115 Selecting a slide design 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than lt Original gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 115 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e
161. atter such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic numerals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways 68 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1 For example you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1 but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Tip Method 2 1 Insert gt Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 54 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Insert Break Type Line break Column break Page break style Default Figure 54 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal plac
162. bar Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 155 Drawing a straight line Click on the Line icon onthe Drawing toolbar and position the mouse pointer where you want to start the line Drag the mouse while keeping the button pressed Release the mouse button at the point where you want to end the line A selection handle appears at each end of the line showing that this is the currently selected object Figure 141 Drawing a straight line To restrict the angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on hold down the Shift key while you draw the line To snap the end of the line to the nearest grid point hold down the Control Ctr key while drawing the line The effect of the Ctr key depends on the settings of the Snap to Grid option on the Note View gt Grid menu Snap to Grid on Ctr deactivates the snap option for this activity Snap to Grid off Ctrl activates the snap option for this activity To extend the line symmetrically in both directions from the starting point hold down the Alt key while drawing the line To change line attributes for example the color or line type select the line by clicking on it then use the tools in the Line and Filling toolbar or for more control right click on the line and choose Line to open the Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of lines Lines with arrowheads The information field on th
163. bes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for toolbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify gt Change icon On the Change Icon dialog you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command CO be H oe ow 3 5 E Ny AB atc Et Fa mA Q R J Piwihh A Vic amp amp The size of an icon should be 16x16 pixel to achieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically Figure 310 Change Icon dialog Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 295 To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into AOO by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons must be 16 x 16 or 26 x 26 pixels in size and cannot contain more than 256 colors Example Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information 2 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Prin
164. ble Wizards are designed to do the basic work Sometimes this is not sufficient for what we want in those cases we can use a wizard as a Starting point and then build upon what it produces The Table Wizard in Base contains two categories of suggested tables business and personal Each category contains sample tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We can delete some of these fields and add other fields A field in a table is one bit of information For example a price list table might have one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the sample wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing to do with our database This section is an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Caution Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our entries and want that number to A automatically increase as we add each entry Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard Figure 157 Step 1 Select fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Cat
165. bol or triangle to the left of Load Save Options Load Save gt OpenOffice org Load Save adsave m Load Save VBA Properties Microsoft Office HTML Compatibility This is where you defir b Language Settings external formats You Figure 295 Load Save options General Load Save options Most of the choices on the Load Save General page are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described below 282 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Load Load user specific settings with the document v Load printer settings with the document Save C Edit document properties before saving W Always create backup copy ea Save AutoRecovery information every 15 Minutes Save URLs relative to file system ky W Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version 1 2 Extended recommended Size optimization for ODF format Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always save as Text document ODF Text Document Figure 296 Choosing Load and Save options Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these document settings are overruled by the user specific settings of t
166. cauecaueseesaeeseeesaeeseeeseesseneas 199 Using data sources in Apache OpenOffice ccccccceccseccseeceseceeecaeeseeceeecaeecaeesaeeceesseeesaeens 199 Sr dala Mm Aa O enn eE E Ea 203 Creating CIE TSS sseairire Ghd oven saadirediteneseasesnnniesssbaneeneseiiarseresinn saardeanustvejorenceseaeevelaaiestaeeuriesaiis 205 Se BUN Oe acdc wiwaategegaceenieirncd onion snwameniinveeomnnnneceron E E 213 Chapter 8 Geiting Starned with PAN oc ctetins stincctteecntecamemneesactanencaatapstenechenexsanseteasdswatateedsesncacnteanioumteseuscacees 221 RP E a E E E E esate A EE E EE E TT ET 221 EEEE EEE PAT I EANTA T AT TE AEETI TE E AT T ET TEOT T 221 SAARE EE nn E PA PEPEO O ae ee E A NE A A E 221 ENE E E E E N E EN ENR 227 PTA EM ety E E EN E 229 awae g EEE D i E I A EE EE E AE EEE AEN E EA I EA EEE A A E 231 Chapter 9 PHANG Exporing ani Exit sessirnar 233 IEKE aE e eons ates E EE A E E E E A E A EE E A O O EEE E 233 E aa a eee E A E E ee ee 233 OS ORE PII OU EN EEEE AE E A EEA E T E A TA E T ET ETT 233 EPN OFE EE E E E EEEE E 242 EP O E T E nent el rte ns eee ne etree eer rere ere eee 248 BURNIN 0 UI ee EEEE E 248 Digital signing gelgalses0 iq i Seeetenner ene neta neta ante nn eet ene ner here terete eee ee eee eee cer 252 REMOVING personal data ccccceccseccsecceeeceeeceeecaeecaeecaeecuecceeceeesaucsueseueceueceeseeesaeeseeeseeesaees 252 Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and FOntwork c sscsssssssssssssnssnssenssenss
167. cccccccccccceccseeeceeeseeeseeeseeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaees 44 Goren F448 Rio 10 0 ene eee ene nt eee ene enna rn nee eer ene eee en re rene eer 45 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 3 Examples ol SMe USE ena eer en Renee ert ne ee ee eee 47 Chapter 3 CLI Started with Writelcsscisssirasin saeco eotenseceeasinsaeseestreer nee 49 ME eI via laa retorts E mec eaattee sce A EE E TEO 49 The Writer Ae erases seveestarceeunctaepacea cyesresaeedueeyasiaaacsnrs ieeeecvesia ones a EEEE EE 49 OUI documen ieee nes ccs tone etna nase as one eget E AEE E 52 Moving guickiy mrougn a docume M esisnsrerinrcrsrnisseannnenni i Nri eE ERUERA NeT 52 WOKING WiNA Nascent eo ee ease so esses ae EOS 53 WOTKINO WIN TEX espais Ssmen osadeseduapnenietanmnucsbeamcinaiiiadseebtahmesaesuadctusieoiasmanapbeensioa wat laeieasnaqenussanest 54 FEU Ree Me areca cs cr rn tcc ste en paces scien Si as ee eae sen oe ee pew nee de ease eerste 62 SE EN iS o E E AA nea ene neon ese peer mee ere EEA ee ene N eer ree 66 Adding comments to COC ION oa cise iccscscavnzosceasenesisedennetsadsnrsastneceaddiavensvettaneriseieenstiecieeriiedees 70 Se G18 9 ole 8 66 g koe eee eRe eee ier eee ne risen ene en eee een eee eee ee eee 71 Creating indexes and DIDNO OI AIG Savio cde ceeessiceuceesatericneversatecedetenadiedccuarscedkecetetewiewenenceyecetesee 71 Adding images and other Qrapnics cccccccceecceecceeeceeece cece eeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeeseeeseesaeeeaes
168. ccess to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 259 Gallery contents provided with AOO are stored in a different location You cannot change this location Creating an image map An image map defines areas of an image called hotspots with hyperlinks to web addresses other files on the computer or parts of the same document Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks Clicking on a hotspot causes Apache OpenOffice to open the linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page AOO Calc for a ods file a PDF viewer for a pdf file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map editor 1 In your AOO document select the picture where you want to define the hotspots 2 Choose Edit gt ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor Figure 268 opens 3 Use the tools and fields in the dialog described on the next page to define the hotspots and links necessary 4 Click the Apply icon y to apply the settings 5 When done click the Save icon fe to save the im
169. ces at the ends of the scroll bars e Choose Window gt Split to remove all split lines at the same time Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol Note If a number beginning with O is entered in to a cell Calc will drop the O for example 01234 becomes 1234 96 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Format Cells Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Background Cell Protection Category Format Lanquage All User defined Number Percent Currency Date Time Options Decimal places F Negative numbers red Thousands separator Format code ogogo User defined Figure 82 Adjusting leading zeros To enter a number and retain the leading O right click on the cell and choose Format Cells gt Numbers In the Format Cells dialog Figure 82 under Options select the required number of Leading zeros The number selected for leading zeros needs to be one higher than the digits in a number For example if the number is 1234 the number entered for the leading zero will be 5 Entering te
170. ck Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 170 Click Next Decide if you want to set up a subform w Add Subfarm Subform based on existing relation Which relation do you want linen to add i l I Subform based on manual selection of fields i Asubform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 170 Adding a subform Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Fuel is preselected under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellD field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellD to the left Figure 171 Click Next Select the fields of your subform Tables or queries hl Available fields Fields in the farm FulID Date m FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 171 Selecting fields of a subform 186 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Because we have already defined the relationship the wizard skips this step Note Caution A Step 5 Arrange controls Each control in a form consists of two parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are pl
171. ckground If you choose a dark background you many need to change many of the labels and headings so they can be seen 1 Select the labels of the top row of controls a Control click the Date label b Control shift click the rest of the labels of the top row The border will gradually grow to the right as you do this until all the labels are enclosed in it Hate Odometer Tolls Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment Dee A Mc MM Ms ee Figure 186 Selecting multiple labels at one time c Click the Control icon in the Design Form toolbar to open the Properties dialog d Change the Background color selection from Default to Light cyan This is a dropdown list Close the Properties dialog 2 Select the other labels in the same way and then change their background color 3 To change the font color for the headings a Open Styles and Formatting using the F11 key Make sure the Paragraph icon is selected at the left end of the icons in Figure 187 b Right click the Heading 2 style to open a pop up window and select Modify from this menu c Inthe Paragraph Style Heading 2 dialog click the Font Effects tab Change Font color from Automatic to Light Cyan 196 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started DE e pE Complimentary close Default First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 So ae Figure 187 Styles and Formating window d Click OK to close the dialog L
172. configured areas for date footer and slide number Object Area for AutoLayouts To add page slide numbers or date and time to the slide footers in your presentation select Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time to open the Header and Footer dialog Figure 128 where you can select and configure these areas on the slide To change the number format 1 2 3 or a b c or i ii iii etc for the page number field choose Format gt Page and then select a format from the list in the Layout Tip Settings area To change the paragraph style modify the Background Objects Presentation style To add other information such as the author of the presentation or the name of the file use Insert gt Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit this field in your slide select it and choose Edit gt Fields See Chapter 2 Adding and Formatting Text in the Impress Guide for more information To change the author information go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data Tip Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 145 F y pri Header and Footer slide Notes and Handouts Include on slide Applytoall ee a e Variable Language Cancel 12 31 11 English USA a Help Footer O Slide number O Do not show on first slide Figure 128 Configuring the slide footer areas The fields y
173. content left right Left margin Right margin Spacing Height AutoFit height Figure 100 Header dialog From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to automatically adjust the height of the header or footer Margin Changing the size of the left or right margin adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 115 Spacing Spacing affects how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click the More button in the header dialog This opens the Border Background dialog Figure 101 From this dialog you can set the background and border of the header or footer For more information see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Style Left o 00cm amp E E r al ae oE r E j r i 0 05 pt nig m Ge User defined 0 50 pt m Top 0 00cm 1 00 pt ee t Bottom 0 00cm m E ia Synchronize E 00 ot Color E Black Shadow style Fosition bl LP ee 0 18cm Figure 101 Header Footer Border Background Setting the contents of the
174. contents have been added the contents are not lost though they may need to be reformatted Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 131 To view the names for the included layouts use the Tooltip feature position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section or on any toolbar icon and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle Tip If tooltips are not enabled choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Help and select the Tips option If the Extended tips option is also selected you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane Several layouts contain one or more content boxes Each of these boxes can be configured to contain one of the following elements Text Movie Picture Chart or Table You can choose the type of contents by clicking on the corresponding icon that is displayed in the middle of the contents box as shown in Figure 118 If instead you intend to use the contents box for text just click anywhere on the box to get a cursor Click to add title e Click to add text Insert Table Insert Chart Insert Picture Insert Movie Figure 118 Selecting contents type To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane If you
175. cord Record eat Insert new record Figure 192 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row Table Format 24 99 8 299 91354 7 Dan Row Height 27 50 12 557 91699 3 Cash E Delete Rows 35 12 10 233 92213 5 Kevin Record i Jot A se fifi Figure 193 Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports Using data sources in Writer and Calc Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge 200 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started i Choosing Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon on the Tip View Data Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps you through creating a mail merge document See Chapter 11 in the Writer Guide Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray
176. cting a slide transition effect You can accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at creating presentations Both of these values can be changed later Tip while working with Slide transitions and animations These two features are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide Note If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here C Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss aution of information should something unexpected occur You might also want to activate the AutoRecovery function Tools gt Options gt Load Save General Make A sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency Formatting a presentation A new presentation contains only one empty slide In this section we will start adding new slides and preparing them for the intended contents Inserting slides This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick e Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide gt New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon In the Presentation toolbar 130 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Sometimes rather than starting from a new slide you want to duplicate a slide you have already inserted To duplicate a slide select the sli
177. d Caution If you choose Keep Old Styles in the message box shown in Figure 29 that message will not appear again the next time you open the document after changing the template it is based on You will not get another chance to update A the styles from the template although you can use the Template Changer extension see page 45 to reactivate the template Adding templates using the Extension Manager The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates graphics macros or other add ins that have been packaged into files with a OXT extension See Chapter 11 Setting up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice for more about the Extension Manager This Web page lists many of the available extensions http extensions services openoffice org To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension package and save it anywhere on your computer 2 InApache OpenOffice select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File gt New gt Templates and Documents and the extension is listed in the Extension Manager Extension Manager Pex English spelling and hyphenation dictio
178. d No Length Decimal places Default value Format example 0 00 m Figure 160 Changing field properties Format Alignment Category Format Language All USD English USA v English USA w User defined 334 00 USD Number 1 234 00 USD Percent 1 234 Currency 1 234 00 ai 1 234 Ime 41 234 00 Scientific EET A Options Decimal places 2 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 Thousands separator Figure 161 Field Format options 4 To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example field 5 Description can be anything or can be left blank 6 To save and close the table choose File gt Save Name the table Fuel Close the Fuel table Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figure 162 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing Right click the gray Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 181 box to the left of Date and select Primary key from the menu Save the table and name it Vacations Close the Vacations table Field Name Field Type Date Date DATE Odometer Number NUMERIC Odometer reading Motel Number NUMERIC Tolls Number NUMERIC total tolls Breakfast Number NUMERIC BPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Lunch Number NUMERIC _ LPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Supper Number NUMERIC
179. d choose Insert gt Comment or press Ctr A t N The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment Writer automatically adds at the bottom of the comment the author s name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created Figure 56 shows an example of text with comments from two different authors Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in F OOo notes are now displayed at the side of 7 ji i S a a banana AER ei EE i ichele Zarri user who created them To insert a note in Yesterday 23 34 a the text the note refers to and select he anchor point of the note is connected by _ Cello Suite 1 de ofthe page where you can type your BWV100 7 attom the author of the note as well as a Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets configure the name you want to appear in Sarabande it courante nt each author will be automatically GIQUE Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Lal Figure 56 Example of comments 70 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Right clicking on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment
180. d on the left shows the value of the selected color on the left and the currently set value from the color value fields on the right Modify the color components as required and click OK to exit the dialog The newly defined color now appears in the lower of the color preview boxes shown in Figure 286 Type a name for this color in the Name box then click the Add button A small box showing the new color is added to the Color table Color Picker 102 Ge al665 Hue 6 Saturation gt Brightness CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Key Figure 287 Choosing colors Another way to define or alter colors is through the Colors page of the Area dialog where you can also save and load palettes a feature that is not possible here In Calc draw a temporary draw object and use the context menu of this object to open the Area dialog If you load a palette in one component of AOO it is only active in that component the other components keep their own palettes Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 277 Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system OpenOffice org will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses f Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helvetica
181. de you want from the Slides pane and then choose Insert gt Duplicate Slide Selecting a layout In the Tasks pane select the Layout drawer to display the available layouts The Layouts differ in the number of elements a slide will contain from a blank slide to a slide with six contents boxes and a title Tasks View X b Master Pages Layouts eL AAA AmA Figure 117 Available slide layouts The first slide in a presentation is normally a title slide The Title Slide which also contains a section for a subtitle or Title Only are suitable layouts for the first slide while for most of the slides you will probably use the Title Contents layout To create the title click on Click to add title assuming the Blank Slide layout was not used and then type the title text To adjust the formatting of the title modify the Title presentation style see Chapter 2 in the Impress Guide for instructions If you are using the Title Slide layout click on Click to add text to add a subtitle Proceed as above to make adjustments to the formatting if required modifying the Subtitle presentation style instead Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time during the preparation of the presentation but changing the layout of a slide that already contains some Note contents can have a dramatic effect It is therefore recommended that you pay particular attention to the layout you select If you do need to change the layout after
182. e 285 Viewing the paths of files used by OpenOffice org Color options On the OpenOffice org Colors page you can specify colors to use in AOO documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color and define new colors These colors are stored in your color palette and are then available in all components of AOO Properties Name Blue amp Color Blue 7 Color table R is G lm E e l5 E E Figure 286 Defining colors to use in color palettes in AOO 276 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To modify a color 1 Select the color to modify from the list or the color table 2 Enter the new values that define the color If necessary change the settings from RGB Red Green Blue to CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black or vice versa The changed color appears in the lower of the two color preview boxes at the top 3 Modify the Name as required 4 Click the Modify button The newly defined color is now listed in the Color table Alternatively click the Edit button to open the Color Picker dialog shown in Figure 287 Here you can select a color from the color window on the left or you can enter values in the boxes on the right using your choice of RGB CMYK or HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness values The color window is linked directly with the color input fields on the right as you choose a color in the window the numbers change accordingly The lower color fiel
183. e Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the first two options under nput settings in Figure 70 to change the Enter key settings 86 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Input settings 7 Press Enter to move selection C Press Enter to switch to edit mode C Expand formatting Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Figure 70 Customizing the effect of the Enter key Moving from sheet to sheet Each sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different sheets in a spreadsheet Using the Navigator When the Navigator is open Figure 68 double clicking on any of the listed sheets selects the sheet Using the keyboard Pressing Contro Page Down moves one sheet to the right and pressing Contro Page Up moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking on one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 71 shows how to do this Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet yyy P Sheet tabs s S
184. e correct arrangement is for your printer 8 On the Print dialog in the Page sides section select Front sides right pages option from the Include drop down box 9 Click the Print button Tip If your printer can print double sided automatically choose All pages Printing envelopes labels business cards Printing envelopes labels or business cards using Writer involves two steps setup and printing For details of how to set these up see Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide To print 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog under Ranges and copies choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click the Print button Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer Several choices are available Please note that some color printers may print in color regardless of the settings you choose Change the printer settings to print in black and white or grayscale 1 Choose File gt Print to open the Print dialog 240 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog for the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you should find options for the Color settings See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color might include black and white or grayscale Choose the required setting 4 Click OK to confirm your ch
185. e in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View gt Value Highlighting from the menu bar Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets 1 2 3 4 5 6 Format a sheet in the style for the new AutoFormat Choose Edit gt Select All Choose Format gt AutoFormat The Add button is now active Click Add In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format Click OK to save The new format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 2 3 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View gt Toolbars gt Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet Tools ae mm fe lb ed S RJE In the Theme Selection dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are ap
186. e in the slide design area Normal view click the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or double click it in the Navigator page 123 Outline view Outline view contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown so if your slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter ai January iF ebruary March Figure 107 Outline view ha Use Outline view for the following purposes 1 Making changes in the text of a slide e Add and delete the text in a slide just as in the Normal view Move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move Up or Move Down on the Text Formatting toolbar highlighted in Figure 108 Change the outline level for any of the paragraphs in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote on the Text Formatting toolbar Both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 2 Compare slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view or you can return to
187. e is shown The results depend on which handle you use To resize an object along one axis use the appropriate side handle To resize both axes use a corner handle The new size appears immediately in the status bar If you press the Shift key while resizing an object the change in size will be carried Note out symmetrically with respect to the two axes so that the aspect height length ratio of the object remains the same Rotation Rotating an object lets you move the object around an axis To do this dynamically with the mouse use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs Note in 3D space and not in one plane See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide regarding rotation when Edit Points mode is active To rotate an object or a group of objects drag the red corner handle point of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the shape of an arc of a circle with an arrow at each end A faded version of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the status bar Rotations are made around an axis which is displayed as a small symbol as shown in Figure 265 You can move the axis of rotation with the mouse Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 163 If you hold down the Shift key during the rotation the operation will be carried out in increments of 15
188. e listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empty it indicates that the chosen key Not combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to reassign a shortcut ote key combination that is already in use you must first delete the existing key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 297 Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctr 0 for the Text body paragraph style Ctr 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctrl 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog Figure 313 opens O OpenOffice org Text body Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Writer Bold Double Underline Centered Functions Category Function Numbering Modify OpenOffice org Macr E Styles Character Frame Pages Numbering i I Figure 313 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select OpenOffice org button to make it available to every component
189. e manipulation program and the results brought into AOO rather than using AOO s inbuilt tools Managing the Gallery Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes and add your own pictures or find extensions containing more graphics The box on the left of the gallery window lists the available themes Click on a theme to see its contents displayed in the Gallery window You can display the Gallery in Icon View Figure 266 or Detailed View and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button similar to the Hide button for the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window when they are docked New Theme Ea E kgrounds confetti Backgrounds Peters ears Bullets arias Homepage greneneres i My Theme Faime lelia Feli i e Apaga Sounds gt M ia Peer 3 as La 1 1 ei 3 4 5 0 11 12 l 14 15 16 l7 1 Control double click here to float Click to hide or show the Gallery Figure 266 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery By default the Gallery is docked above the workspace To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace resizes in response As with other docked windows you can float the Gallery by moving the mouse pointer over an edge of the Gallery window holding dow
190. e scenes code that actually makes it work are the same as for most other programs A dialog is a special type of window Its purpose is to inform you of something or request input from you or both It provides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action The technical names for common controls are shown in Figure 1 not shown is the list box from which you select an item In most cases we do not use the technical terms in this book but it is useful to know them because the Help and other sources of information often use them In most cases you can interact only with the dialog not the document itself as long as the dialog remains open When you close the dialog after use usually clicking OK or another button saves your changes and closes the dialog then you can again work with your document Some dialogs can be left open as you work so you can switch back and forth between the dialog and your document An example of this type is the Find amp Replace dialog Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Page order Top to bottom then right Fi Left to right then down Ww First page number Print O Column and row headers Wl Charts 3 Grid Drawing objects Comments L Formulas Wi Objects graphics W Zero values Scale Scaling mode Scaling factor 100 ok Cancel Help Reset Figure 1 Dialog showing common controls 1 Tabbed page not
191. e started On Windows it is called the Start menu or use the Apache OpenOffice Quickstarter On Gnome it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu Details vary with your operating system see Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice e From any open component of AOO Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop down menu or choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When AOO was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each Note component was added to your system menu The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 119 When you start Impress for the first time the Presentation Wizard is shown Here you can choose from the following options e Empty presentation which gives you a blank document e From template which is a presentation designed with a template of your choice e Open existing presentation e Click Create to open the main Impress window For detailed instructions about how to use the Presentation Wizard see Creating a new presentation on page 128 If you prefer not to use the Presentation Wizard in future you can select Do not show this wizard again You can enable the wizard again later under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt G
192. e status bar shows them only as lines Click on the Line Ends with lt Arrow icon to draw an arrow Choosing line endings Several types of line endings arrows circles squares and others are available in Draw Choose View gt Toolbars gt Arrows or click on the small black triangle on the Lines and Arrows adii icon on the Drawing toolbar to open a toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows The last used command is stored on the toolbar to make it quicker to call it up again 156 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started m jp al 9 10 by ag 1 Line 5 Line 45 8 Line with square arrow 2 Line Ends with Arrow 6 Line starts with arrow 9 Dimension line 3 Line with arrow circle 7 Line with circle arrow 10 Line with arrows 4 Line with arrow square Figure 142 Arrows toolbar Drawing a rectangle or square Drawing a rectangle is similar to drawing a straight line except that you click on the Rectangle icon from the Drawing toolbar and the imaginary line drawn by the mouse corresponds to a diagonal of the rectangle The rectangle changes shape as you drag the mouse around Figure 143 Drawing a rectangle Hold down the Shift key to draw a square Hold down the Alt key to draw a rectangle starting from its center To combine the effects hold down both the Shift and Alt keys simultaneously Drawing a circle or ellipse To draw an ellipse also c
193. e the frozen areas Rows 4 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 93 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page The first three rows and columns remained because are frozen into place You can set the freeze point at a row a column or both a row and a column as in Figure 77 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Choose Window gt Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Choose Window gt Freeze Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell and a vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns choose Window gt Freeze The check mark by Freeze will vanish BEE _ iinet z 3 2 a 2 8 4 oe Gl Gl al 3 tt amp i i D i _ Ta i n ey o gt H Ho H z g name sie ele Date 10 02 10 03 10 04 10 08 10 06 10 07 ance aa Tedde 2 10 13 10 14 4 Ca Average 2675 Possible 28 0 1 0 3 0 12 0 18 0 20 a0 gol gol 35 4 0 78 a 11 0 i4 78 6 200 0 Smith John 28
194. e the same capabilities as the specialized raster graphics programs like Adobe Photoshop or The Gimp See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for details and examples Working with 3D objects Although Draw does not match the functionality of the leading drawing or picture editing programs it is capable of producing and editing very good 3D drawings Draw offers two types of 3D objects 3D bodies and 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different possibilities for further editing of the object rotation illumination perspective 3D shapes are simpler to set up and edit than 3D bodies but 3D bodies currently allow for more customization See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide for details 170 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Exporting graphics To save a Draw image in a format other than odg use File gt Export Draw can save to many graphic file formats as listed in Chapter 12 in this book You can export the entire file or selected objects You can also export Draw files to HTML PDF or Flash PDF export is the same as for any part of Apache OpenOffice as described in Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing in this book Flash export creates a swf file HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choose to display the pages in frames with a navigator and can set an inde
195. early any kind of object contains such an additional text element These texts have slight differences to those in text frames concerning position and hyphenation For more about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Gluepoints and connectors All Draw objects have associated invisible gluepoints which become visible when you choose any of the connectors under the Connector icon 7 onthe Drawing toolbar and then move the mouse pointer over the object Most objects have four gluepoints as shown in Figure 146 You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the toolbar under the Gluepoint icon Ed on the Drawing toolbar Figure 146 Four gluepoints Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 159 Gluepoints are different from handles the small blue or green squares around an object The handles are for moving or resizing an object The gluepoints attach connectors to an object Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to gluepoints on an object When you move the other object the connector moves with it Connectors are particularly useful for making organizational charts You can reorganize the blocks of your chart and all the connected objects stay connected Figure 147 shows two Draw objects and a connector Figure 147 A connector between two objects Draw offers a range of different connectors and connector functions Open the float
196. earning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one time There are other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the same steps for each heading Tip 4 To add a graphic to the background a Right click on the background and select Page from the pop up menu b On the Page Style dialog click the Background tab change the As dropdown list from Color to Graphic c Click Browse to find and select the graphic file you want to use and click Open In the Type section of the Background tab select Area d Click OK to close the dialog The form should look like Figure 188 Ei T Figure 188 Finished form Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 197 Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Figure 189 or choose View gt Toolbars gt Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon circled Figure 189 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the
197. ed address Notes _ LastName NumberofTracks Birthdate Figure 157 Selecting fields for the table Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes See Figure 158 You can then make changes to meet your needs Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes An entry with Note that field blank will then not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No Selected fields Field information CollectionID Field name CollectionID AlbumTitle DatePurchased Format Now Notes Numberoftracks Entry required No H Photo ia r Length 0 Figure 158 Changing field types Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 177 CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes AlbumTitle Entry required Leave Entry required as No unless all of your music is in albums Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 characters counting the Spaces do not change the length Artist Use the Default setting And since music has artists set Entry Required to Yes Date Purchased Field type default date setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date In Base the maximum length of each field must
198. ed and can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File gt Properties gt Description Fields are covered in detail in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers on page 68 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Type the word page and a space then insert the page number as above 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File gt Properties If Note you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of contents In addition many documents have the front m
199. ed in Apache OpenOffice You can create slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts and a wide range of graphic objects such as clipart drawings and photographs Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus text styles and background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you through the Impress environment while designing your presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simple slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Creating drawings in Impress is similar to the Draw program included in Apache OpenOffice For this reason we recommend that you also see Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates and Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw in this book You may also wish to consult the Draw Guide for more details on how to use the drawing tools Starting Impress You can start Impress in several ways e From the Apache OpenOffice Start Center if no component is open click on the Presentation icon e From the system menu the standard menu from which most applications ar
200. eee nen een eee eer E ee wert eran ercr T 91 PTS Us ETE A T AI EIEE tig ee tee te T E A A EN TET AT 93 Entering data using the KEY VOI ps icnccsscncesnacscnssaceseperaneccapvatenedanecessacidecdannesaessetwausessaneatantontesiacest 96 Opeeceding Up dala GNU sree at ee earna EEEa EEEE EE REA REEERE 98 De oaee pes ee 41 pie A E E E T nee TEE I EANA A A eee TEN 101 Fe ON GN e EEEE E AE E E EE E EPEE AA E ANE AEA E AS 101 P 001015 0 lt fc Serene tee titer erate snennt nt Mreerte Mee net an nertr ei mney ee renn nantes neon ere re een eet marta cere meena 102 AuUtolormaltting cells and SNEGLE ee eee eee eee eee ene ene eee eee ve eee ne mek et ee ERE pect er eee err 106 Formatting spreadsheets using 1NCINGS vase caccdeccrncesacososnusaraces ancesiewenasysuddecetworssssarcabeceecdaraewentes 107 Using conditional GOT AV UN is cap ccete en coe cus ceneeecesnmsncensssaivemusacmaesceatnetaceiceratnenauecasiecaeennamoaseieninniaid 108 Fang ande POwWNg Ua eeren aa niena En AEE E AE AEE E EEEE E N 108 SE E a a o EEA en eee eee E EE AE AEE T E E ENE PET EE O E ere 109 4 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Using formulas anq TON CHONG sas cdscecsenctavacl 06caccudacscesvecoesicbeotecscyesstecacesersscolesseceevauaceteuredacsteusess 110 PWN 20M EEEE 110 PN ME EREEREER AA T ET E EE EA ETNEN E PEE ATE TT 111 Chapter 5 Getting Started WIN IMP ESS sireisas Rara EEEN E 119 A E e r E E E E E 119 E WN EOE oeoecienaeeeneuseaee 119 The main Impress I
201. efault Arial el io W BS U s eee A I fx B ee A E S oad o dar S Fyd toolbar Active cell Active cell reference Column Headers Name box sheets Sheet2 x fh gt Shee 1 3 Defauk e 100 gi d ee a n Figure 60 Parts of the Calc window Toolbars Three toolbars are located under the Menu bar by default the Standard toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the Formula Bar The icons buttons on these toolbars provide a wide range of common commands and functions You can also modify these toolbars as discussed in Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice In the Formatting toolbar the three boxes on the left are the Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists They show the current setting for the selected cell or area The Apply Style list may not be visible by default Click the down arrow to the right of each box to open the list fala Default Bg 107 B f U Arial Al A E f sf Ss Df Figure 61 Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists 80 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Formula bar On the left hand side of the Formula bar is a small text box called the Name Box with a letter and number combination in tt such as D7 This combination called the cell reference is the column letter and row number of the selected cell To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicki
202. efining the primary key field The primary key serves only one purpose to uniquely identify the record Any name Note can be used for this field We have used Fuel D for convenience so we know to which table it belongs 3 All other fields Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType a Type the next field name in the Field Name column b Select the Field Type for each field e For Date use Date DATE Press the D key to select it e PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting e All other fields use Number NUMERIC Press the N key once to select it c FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer need changes in the Field Properties section Figure 160 e FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousands of a gallon in the USA where live e Odometer Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 e FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button This opens the Field Format window Figure 161 Use Currency as 180 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for yours gt Fed Name Field Type g FuellD Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE p FuelCost FuelQuantity Number NUMERIC Odometer Number NUMERIC PaymentTyp Text VARCHAR 4 Field Properties Entry require
203. eft or Right Caution Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still choose the opposite direction from what you intend which could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you want to fill If the cell contains a number the number will fill in series If the cell contains text the same text will fill in the direction you chose Tip 98 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started A A Original 1 Original 2 Original 3 Original 4 Original 5 Original 6 Original f Original 8 Original 9 Original 10 11 12 Figure 83 Using the Fill tool Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill series The default lists are for the full and abbreviated days of the week and the months of the year but you can create your own lists as well To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the cells to fill choose Edit gt Fill gt Series In the Fill Series dialog Figure 84 select AutoFill as the Series type and enter as the Start value an item from any defined series The selected cells then fill in the other items on the list sequentially repeating from the top of the list when they reach the end of the list You can also use Edit gt Fill gt Series to create a one time fill series for numbers by entering the star
204. egory Select Personal The Sample Tables drop down list changes to a list of personal sample tables 2 Sample tables Select CD Collection The Available fields box changes to a list of available fields for this table 3 Selected fields Using the gt button move the following fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlobumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTracks 4 Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo 176 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofTracks field 5 If you make a mistake in selecting fields click on the field name in the Selected fields list and use the lt button to move it from the Selected fields list back to the Available fields list 6 If you make a mistake in the order of the selected fields click on the field name that is in the wrong order and use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected fields list to move the field name to the correct position 7 Click Next Category Business Personal Sample tables Employees y Available fields Selected fields City E CollectionID Notes Album Title Photo Artist Title DatePurchas
205. elect Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed 114 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Multiple manual row and column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove each one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit gt Manual Break Column break may be grayed out Note In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break For example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove it from any cell in column H Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area Headers are set in the same way as footers Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style for a spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Setting a header or footer To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Choose Format gt Page 2 On the Page Style dialog select the Header or Footer tab See Figure 100 3 Select the Header on option Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Same
206. elect an object with a single click 4 Drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 265 You can also right click on the object and choose Insert gt Copy n Ea F a ES a BE N Defaut Y m 9p hs NewTheme amp 8 E3 amp Backgrounds roses opt libreoffice basis3 3 share gallery w e Backgrounds fs Bullets is Homepage B My Theme fs Rulers fs Sounds my rm Figure 265 Copying a graphic object from the Gallery into a document oval marks the Hide Show button for the Gallery To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Control keys drag and drop the object into the document 256 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Inserting an image as a background To insert an image as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or gt Paragraph Modifying and positioning graphics Apache OpenOffice provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other guides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an imag
207. ements Example 1 5x4 For this example we will enter a simple formula 5X4 On the Elements window 1 Select the top left button of the categories top section 2 Click on the multiplication symbol Unary binary operators a H Multiplication Figure 229 Selecting the multiplication symbol When you select the multiplication symbol on the Elements window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box like this Ux atx LF OB Gt Figure 230 Result of selecting the multiplication symbol The lt gt symbols shown in Figure 230 are placeholders that you can replace by other text for example 5 and 4 The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 231 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 223 l To keep the equation from updating automatically choose View gt AutoUpdate Tip display from the menu bar To update a formula manually press F9 or choose View gt Update ED E3 E Figure 231 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator Right click context menu Another way to access mathematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This pops up the menu shown in Figure 232 The items in this menu correspond exactly to those in the Elements window Unary Binary Operators Relations Set Operations Functions Operators Attributes Brackets Fo
208. emplate as described in Chapter 2 Styles and Templates Customizing menus You can add and rearrange items on the menu bar add items to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog go to the Menus page 3 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example OpenOffice org Writer or for a selected document for example MyDoc odt 290 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOrfice org Writer Menus yenu Menu Menu Content Entries g 4 4 E Modify Save S Save all save In OpenOffice org Writer ha Description Creates a new OpenOtfice org document Figure 306 The Menus page of the Customize dialog 4 Inthe section OpenOffice org name of the program example Writer Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The list includes all the main menus as well as submenus menus that are contained under another menu For example in addition to File Edit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog 5 To customize the selected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following section
209. empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards from cell to cell Adding charts To insert a chart in a slide you can either use Insert gt Chart from the main menu bar clicking on the Chart icon elh in the main toolbar or after inserting a new slide clicking on the Insert Chart icon Impress will insert a default chart and open the Chart dialog To modify the chart type insert your own data and change the formatting refer to the Impress Guide Adding media files You can insert various types of media files such as music and movie clips into your slide by selecting the Insert Movie icon in an empty contents box A media player will open at the bottom of the screen and you can preview the media When an audio file is inserted the contents box will show a loudspeaker image 140 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Caution In Linux based systems such as Ubuntu media files do not work straight out of the box You need to download the Java Media Framework API JMF and add A the path to jmf jar to the Class Path in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Java Adding graphics spreadsheets and other objects Graphics such as shapes callouts arrows and so on are often useful to complement the text on a slide These objects are handled much the same way as graphics in Draw For more
210. eneral gt New document and select the Start with wizard option The main Impress window The main Impress window has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation of a presentation File Edit Yiew nsert Format Tools SlideShow Window Help X E BHL aa E Lpa E i n O amp Se B ET gs cte e E cra 2 Al color o awe cja Slides x Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Tasks x b Master Pages Layouts T Click to add title Click to add text b Table Design b Custom Animation iE t Slide Transition OOOO D me T d r B a B A amp Dee amp be ig Baras iH 002000 Side 1 1 Gefault a amp 65 Figure 103 Main window of Impress ovals indicate the Hide Show markers You can close the Slides pane or the Tasks pane by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the pane or by choosing View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane to deselect the pane To reopen a pane choose View gt Slide Pane or Tip View gt Tasks Pane again You can also maximize the Workspace area by clicking on the Hide Show marker in the middle of the vertical separator line indicated by ovals in Figure 103 Using the Hide Show marker hides but does not close the Slides and Tasks panes To restore the pane click again on its Hide Show marker 120 Taming Apache O
211. enssenssenssenssenseonseonseonseonseonseonsss 253 AOC Eana a EAE E E E EE E EA EE EPE E T E AE EE E ET PEE S 253 Adding magen lo a UN see ss es esha a a aiai eia 253 Modifa and positioning grani CS eesssiesssie nanie E 257 PT a NER NV eae vases E EEE EE E EE 257 Creating an Us asses voces aces ance eniocatnceniensnceacnedsasececnutscededsacancabscteie cecsereieanretateaaeaem senor 260 Using Apache OpenOffice s drawing tOOIS ccccccseccceeceeeceeeceeeseeceseceeecesecasesesesseeseeeseeess 261 Bila le as g1 0 EET cee ene en aes E PEE neces mee ate ety enter A E E nena EET re 263 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOfPfiCe cccscccseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseneseeeseeesnssenesenssenes 269 Choosing options for all of Apache COCO NIG Ciao cccuterccsccanesecetecvazerseamverareumieeotcleoasaesseen tare 269 Choosing options for loading and saving COCUMENNS cccceecceeeceeeceeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaes 282 Choosing language SGN Sa ioe teic aid svccandacnssehe Gooossissienmentdacectedssneetiedantedaosicuosanie ade saratetactelsnsdonn 287 Choosing Micinel opio aene ect ane ea re eee 289 COnPONING AICS AINO CON GCE HIMGU ONS seesand aA TEDES 289 CUSTOMIZING Apache DONIC orccccrccercessareosesnecesierssqeetesrovieussesteusieesessesdhieditnesencomieieeiiees 290 Adding functionality with IVS IONNS assists accra ccedecetessonsdasencoiide sini autenseneleesiverteraleons mactaestiasies 299 Chapter 12 Open Source Open
212. er Assign Template current document and Assign Template folder In Calc Impress and Draw only the Assign Template folder choice is available 3 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File gt Templates gt Assign Template current document 4 Inthe Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 5 Save the document If you now look in File gt Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page Organizing templates Apache OpenOffice can only use templates that are in Apache OpenOffice template folders You can create new Apache OpenOffice template folders and use them to organize your templates For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also import and export templates To begin choose File gt Templates gt Organize from the main menu The Template Management dialog opens Note All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears 3 Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter Apache OpenOffice saves the folder with the name that you entered
213. er formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to display a color palette Click on the required color To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 11 To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of the Format Cells dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font characteristics See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for more information Automatic Formatting the cell borders To add a border to a cell or group of selected cells click on the Borders icon on the formatting toolbar and select one of the border options displayed in the palette Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 105 To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more controls including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are Note editing that cell For example
214. ers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages see page 287 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by AOO to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closing tag an HTML_OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have AOO ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If OpenOffice org Writer is selected specific OpenOffice org Writer instructions are exported Export OpenOffice org Basic Select this option to include OOo Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you create the OpenOffice org Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted OpenOffice org Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML d
215. es You can create a table from text or convert a table to text using Table gt Convert from the menu bar You can edit the contents of these tables in the same way as you edit any other text Chapter 9 Working with Tables in the Writer Guide describes how to format tables add or delete columns and rows merge and split tables and cells add and sort data and perform basic spreadsheet functions in a table of data Creating a table from a Calc spreadsheet You can insert a table from a Calc spreadsheet into a Writer document 1 Open the Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert 2 In the spreadsheet select the cells 3 Choose Edit gt Copy or press Ctrl C 4 Inthe Writer document choose Edit gt Paste or press Ctrl V The cell range is pasted as an object 72 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Alternatively you can open both the Calc and Writer documents and drag and drop the cells from Calc to Writer 1 In the spreadsheet select the cells 2 Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells 3 Drag the selected cells into the text document To edit a table created from a Calc spreadsheet double click on it The table opens in Calc Creating a chart You can create a chart in three ways e Insert a chart based on data from cells in Calc or Writer These charts update automatically when the source data changes e Insert a chart with a default data set and then use t
216. es If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog the next time you open it Because the page style is affected the changed margins apply to all pages using that style Note To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of the rulers are the margins Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 69 i Figure 55 Moving the margins The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in i the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin Tip marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Adding comments to a document Authors and reviewers often use comments formerly called notes to exchange ideas ask for suggestions or mark items needing attention To insert a comment in the text place the cursor in the place the comment refers to an
217. es containing letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go down These column and row headers form the cell references that appear in the Name Box on the Formula Bar Figure 62 You can turn these headers off by selecting View gt Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs These tabs enable access to each individual sheet with the visible active sheet having a white tab You can choose colors for the different sheet tabs by right clicking the space choosing Tab Color and choosing a color from the palette Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 81 Tab Color Default Insert Sheet Delete Sheet Rename Sheet Move Copy Sheet Select All Sheets Sheet Events Tab Color Sheet 1 3 Default Figure 63 Choosing a tab color Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window is the status bar which provides information about the spreadsheet and convenient ways to quickly change some of its features Most of the fields are similar to those in other components of Apache OpenOffice see Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Calc in t
218. es icon to start a new document using a template Apache OpenOffice 3 Drawing Spreadsheet Be Database Presentation Formula Templates Figure 11 Apache OpenOffice Start Center You can also start a new document in one of the following ways e Use File gt New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created e Press Control N on the keyboard e Use File gt Wizards for some special types of documents If a document is already open in Apache OpenOffice the new document opens in a new window Opening an existing document When no document is open the Start Center provides an icon for opening an existing document or choosing from a list of recently edited documents Open a file browser Open a list of recently opened documents Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 23 You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways e Choose File gt Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Control O on the keyboard In each case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open If a document is already open in Apache OpenOffice the second document opens in a new window In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will on
219. etion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered e Delete specific entries from the word completion list e Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Note Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 61 Using AutoText Use AutoText to store text tables graphics and other items for reuse and assign them to a key combination for easy retrieval For example rather than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you can set up an AutoText entry to insert those words when you type sm and press F3 Creating AutoText To store some text as AutoText 1 Type the text into your document 2 Select the text 3 Choose Edit gt AutoText or press Contro F3 4 Inthe AutoText dialog type a name for the AutoText in the Name box Writer will suggest a one letter shortcut which you can change 5 Inthe large box to the left choose the category for the AutoText entry for example My Auto Text 6 Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu 7 Click Close to return to your document Tip If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields See Chap
220. ettings 244 PDF import 300 PDF Options dialog 242 PDF A 1a 244 personal data removing 252 arranging 162 pictures dynamic movement 163 adding from file 253 dynamic size modification 163 linking 254 framing 162 pixels 149 hidden 162 polygons Draw 158 Index 313 positioning objects 170 Powerpoint See Impress 119 presentation output medium 129 slide design 129 transition effect 129 transitions 129 Presentation Wizard 128 presentations saving 308 primary key 178 primary key database 178 Print dialog 234 print file directly 233 print options general 275 print preview Calc 242 Writer 241 print ranges Calc 111 printer settings 283 printing black and white on color printer 240 booklet 239 brochure 239 Calc 111 237 envelopes labels business cards 240 general options 234 grayscale on color printer 241 handouts 239 headers and footers Calc 115 Impress and Draw 238 multiple pages per sheet 235 notes Impress 239 page break Calc 114 page order details scale in Calc 112 page orientation 235 rows or columns on every page 113 selecting what to print 236 Writer 236 Professional Template Pack extension 301 Q queries database aliases 212 creating using a Wizard 206 creating using Design View 208 joined fields 187 search conditions 207 Query Wizard database 206 Quickstarter 17 enabling 272 quotation marks 98 R raster graphics 170 rectangle drawing 157 redlines 74 redo change 29 regular expre
221. fication and printing dates and resets the editing time to zero the creation date to the current date and time and the version number to 1 To remove version information either go to File gt Versions select the versions from the list and click Delete or use Save As and save the file with a different name 252 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to Apache OpenOffice AOO documents AOO can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP Graphics in Apache OpenOffice are of three basic types e Image files such as photos drawings and scanned images e Diagrams created using AOO s drawing tools e Charts created using AOO s Chart facility This chapter covers images and diagrams More detailed descriptions on working with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and Impress Guide Instructions on how to create charts are given in the Calc Guide Adding images to a document Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting an image file directly froma graphics program or a scanner or from the Apache OpenOffice Gallery Inserting an image file When the image is in a file stored on the computer you can insert it into an AOO document using either of
222. field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Edit from the pop up menu Double click the FuelCost field in the End Reading query list to add it to the query table at the bottom 3 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field Type the following in a Field cell in the table at the bottom End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer e Type the following in its Alias cell cost per mile Note If you use the metric system cost per km is the appropriate alias 4 Save and close the query 5 Open anew report Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Report Wizard 6 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 7 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next 8 Group fields Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 9 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 10 Choose layout accept the default Click Next 11 Create the report e Change the report name to Fuel Statistics The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary Select Modify report layout Click Finish Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 217 Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode Figu
223. fy r Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 151 Text Formatting toolbar If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the Text Formatting toolbar which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer For more information see Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer in this book Liberation Sans gt 18 B7 U A D P Ala AM A a Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand shapes and for organizing them on the page Options toolbar Use the Options toolbar to activate or deactivate various drawing aids To display the Options toolbar select View gt Toolbars gt Options Options ele mepe e sei cae Figure 135 Options toolbar Choosing and defining colors Color Bar To display the Color Bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace SHEEEREEES EO ES ERER SEER RERERE ORES SES SEREEEST ESS SREREEEEER E E nEn This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the objects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color You can access several specialized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste To do this choose Format gt Area or the pouring can icon on the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Area dialog Choose the Colors tab To load
224. fy which items are visible and the colors used to display various items Color scheme Scheme OpenOffice org Save Delete Custom colors On User interface elements Color setting Preview General Document background _ Automatic 5 W Text boundaries _ Automatic Application background _ Automatic v Object boundaries _ Automatic Table boundaries C Automatic Font color Automatic ts M Figure 291 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries e To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then click OK Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain showing some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the OpenOffice org program Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option 280 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started is not shown on all AOO installations See Assistive Tools in
225. g document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 17 A Text Document HA Spreadsheet i Presentation zA Drawing fa Database EA Formula 4 From Template pen Document W Load OpenOffice org During System Start Up Eyit Quickstarter Figure 2 Quickstarter pop up menu Disabling the Quickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent Apache OpenOffice from loading during system startup deselect the Load OpenOffice org during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load OpenOffice org during system start up checkbox in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory Using the Quickstarter in Linux and Mac OS X Apache OpenOffice under Linux has a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows The checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter If you do not have this checkbox the Quickstarter module is not installed on your system Mac OS X provides similar functionality through a
226. g in ODF Format 4 Inthe Export of text files dialog select the options you want and then click OK Export Text File Field options OK Character set Western Europe Windows 1252 WinLatin P B Cancel Field delimiter A Text delimiter i F Quote all text cells Save cell content as shown E Fixed colurnn width Figure 67 Choosing options when exporting to Text CSV Navigating within spreadsheets Calc provides many ways to navigate within a spreadsheet from cell to cell and sheet to sheet You can generally use whatever method you prefer Going to a particular cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name Box Figure 62 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the cell you want to go to 84 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want and press Enter Using the Navigator am To open the Navigator click its icon i on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the Menu bar or double click on the Sheet Sequence Number Sheet1 3 in the Status Bar Type the cell reference into the top two fields labeled Column and Row and press Enter In Figure 68 the Navigator would select cell A7
227. g master documents Master documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a book a thesis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you don t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents TOC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become familiar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the reader to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form e To view information held in a
228. g to go back to the Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format mode icon A l 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for that word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format mode icon again or press the Esc key Caution When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last Fill Format action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 33 Using the Apply Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Tip Select More at the bottom of the list to open the Styles and Formatting window Fi
229. gh the elements with this same first letter e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numerical fields or dropdown lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by the spacebar Finally the Enter key only acts as a line break to move the cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move from non text fields to non text fields it will not do so from a text field Use the Tab key instead If we did not have a subform for fuel data pressing the Tab key in the last field would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Note Since we have a subform form using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numerical fields The Payment field is a dropdown list Enter the data just as you did in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of fuel data for this day
230. ght click on the sheet tab you wish to move or copy 2 Select Move Copy Sheet from the context menu 3 On the Move Copy Sheet dialog Figure 76 e Select or deselect the Copy option at the bottom e To document select the document in which you want to place the sheet By default the field will show the current document If you have another spreadsheet open its name will appear in the drop down list along with new document e Insert before select the position within the target document 4 When you are done click OK f Move Copy Sheet rE So To document EATA Cancel Help Sheet Sheet3 move to end position Figure 76 Move Copy Sheet dialog 92 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started If you choose new document as the location a new spreadsheet will be Caution created This may cause conflicts with formulas linked to other sheets in the previous location If you accidentally move a sheet you can fix it by moving or A copying the sheet back to the original location This caution also apply for moving sheets to other existing documents Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and choose Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or chose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Multiple sheets To delete multiple sheets select them as described earlier then either right click over one of the t
231. h table in the report This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border It should now look something like Figure 224 218 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Figure 224 Realigned columns in a report Step 3 Change the number formatting in the cells The fuel quantity should have three decimal places The Begin End and Distance should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 2 3 4 Right click the cell below Quantity and select Number format The cell is circled in Figure 224 In the Options section Figure 225 a Change the number of Decimal places to 3 b Click the green checkmark Click OK Options Decimal places E a Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code 0 000 lv Figure 225 Options section of the Number Formating window Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency Click OK Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency d Inthe Option section e Set the number of decimal places to 3 Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and close the report Double click the report It sho
232. he Calc Guide Sheet 1 3 Default INSRT STD Sheet Page Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 64 Left end of Calc status bar Sum 0 eS gt _ 100 i Digital Cell or object Zoom Zoom signature Information slider percent Figure 65 Right end of Calc status bar Opening and saving CSV files Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice includes instructions on starting new Calc documents opening existing documents and saving documents A special case for Calc is opening and saving comma separated values CSV which are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet Each line in a CSV file represents a row ina spreadsheet Commas semicolons or other characters are used to separate the cells Text is entered in quotation marks numbers are entered without quotation marks 82 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Opening a CSV file To open a CSV file in Calc 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Locate the CSV file that you want to open 3 Ifthe file has a csv extension select the file and click Open 4 Ifthe file has another extension for example txt select the file select Text CSV csv txt xIs in the File type box scroll down into the spreadsheet section to find it and then click Open 5 On the Text Import dialog Figure 66 select the Separator options to divide the text in the file into columns You can preview the layout of the imported d
233. he Data Table dialog to enter your own data for that chart These charts can be created in Writer Impress and Draw e Copy a chart from Calc or Writer into another document These charts are snapshots of the data at the time of copying They do not change when the source data changes To create a chart based on the values in a Writer table 1 Click inside the Writer table 2 Choose Insert gt Object gt Chart A chart preview and the Chart Wizard are displayed 3 Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart To create a chart based on values of its own 1 If you have not selected any cells choose Insert gt Object gt Chart to insert a chart with default data 2 You can change the default data values by double clicking on the chart and then choosing View gt Chart Data Table For more about working with charts see the Calc Guide Adding a movie or sound To insert a movie or sound file into your document 1 Click where you want to insert the file 2 Choose Insert gt Movie and Sound 3 Inthe File Open dialog select the file that you want to insert The file types listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems 4 Click Open Alternatively you can choose Tools gt Media Player to open the Media Player Use the Media Player to preview all supported media files Click the Apply button in the Media Player window to insert the current media file into your document To play a movie
234. he correct password and its permissions can be restricted Note Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer respects the Settings Figure 257 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Links Security File encryption and permission Open password set PDF document will be encrypted Permission password set PDF document will be restricted Printing Not permitted Low resolution 150 dpi High resolution Changes Not permitted Inserting deleting and rotating pages Eilling in form fields Commenting filling in form fields Any except extracting pages Enable copying of content Enable text access for accessibility tools Figure 256 Security page of PDF Options dialog Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 247 PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Links Security File encryption and permission No open password set PDF document will not be encrypted No permission password set PDF document will be unrestricted Set passwords Set open password Password a C g nfi r m seeess Set permission password Password Confirm Figure o 257 Se 7 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Exporting to other formats Apache OpenOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file ty
235. he document with the different template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existing document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Search and Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Search and Replace 44 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you do not want this material you need to delete it 1 Use File gt New gt Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everything in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 Writer only This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Download the Template Changer extension from http extensions services openoffice org and install it as described on page 43 2 Close and reopen Apache OpenOffice Now the File gt Templates menu has two new choices in Writ
236. he forbidden elements are greyed out not available Tagged PDF Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document s contents This can help to display the document on devices with different screens and when using screen reader software Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes significantly Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page names in Impress and Draw documents as bookmarks a table of contents list displayed by most PDF viewers Export comments Exports comments as PDF notes You may not want this Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on an odd page Apache OpenOffice inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page Embed standard fonts
237. he left of the status bar to help you select the correct object This method generally works in Windows but on a Linux system it usually does not Note If the Alt key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press the Tab key to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing When you click on the selected object its outline will appear briefly through the objects covering it In the illustration to the right the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the circle was made transparent in order to see the square Arranging objects In a complex drawing several objects may be stacked on top of one another To rearrange the stacking order move an object to the front or to the back of the stack select the object choose Modify gt Arrange and choose Bring Forward or Send Backward Or right click the object choose Arrange from the context menu then choose Bring Forward or Send Backward These options are also available from the Arrange tear off toolbar from the it button on the Drawing toolbar A keyboard shortcut is Shift Ctrl plus sign to bring an object to the top and Shift Ctrl minus to send an object to the bottom
238. he paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph e Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 63 is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles To turn autoformatting on or off choose Format gt AutoCorrect and select or deselect the items on the list Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapters 6 Introduction to Styles and 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar See Figure 48 select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar Note It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your information first then apply Numbering Bullets or apply them as you type Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sub list under it as in an outline by
239. he person who opens it If you deselect this option the user s personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document For example your choice in the options for Writer of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecovery information every Choose whether to enable AutoRecovery and how often to save the information used by the AutoRecovery process AutoRecovery in AOO overwrites the original file If you also choose Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save
240. he text enlarged to make it easier to read Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or smaller For example if a sheet would normally print out as four pages two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout the reduce enlarge option must be used Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 2 3 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 This automatically changes Rows to repeat from none to user defined To repeat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined Click OK Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 113 Note You do not need to select the entire range of the ro
241. header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 101 to display the dialog shown in Figure 102 Areas Each area in the header or footer is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the Header drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below the area boxes To format a footer the choices are the same 116 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started TE Page Style Default Left area Center area Right area Test Left Sheet1 24 10 2008 08 59 55 fader Custom Custom header Figure 102 Edit contents of header or footer Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes A Opens the Text Attributes dialog pai Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field Inserts the Date field fl Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field nm Inserts the current page number Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 117 118 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress Presentations in Apache OpenOffice What is Impress Impress is the presentation slide show program includ
242. hecker 60 spelling options 288 spreadsheet using as data source 199 spreadsheets cell reference 84 definition 79 navigate 84 Opening 305 saving 307 saving as CSV 84 Standard toolbar 19 Start Center 23 starting anew document 23 starting OpenOffice org 17 status bar 22 Calc 82 Draw 151 Impress 122 Writer 50 Style dialog 35 36 styles 166 Apply Style list 34 assigning to shortcut keys 298 AutoUpdate 35 changing using Style dialog 35 creating by dragging and dropping 37 creating from selection 36 creating new 36 creating using Style dialog 36 custom 36 defining a sequence 48 deleting 39 description 31 141 Fill Format 33 formatting text 136 linking 36 loading from template or document 38 modifying 34 types supported 31 updating from a selection 35 Styles and Formatting window 32 Sun Microsystems 303 support 9 system font user interface 273 T tab stops 59 table of contents automated 71 Table Wizard database 176 tear off toolbars 19 template associate with document 44 create document from 39 create from document 40 create using wizard 41 deleting 46 description 31 editing 42 exporting 46 Extension Manager 43 folders 45 update document styles from 42 Template Changer extension 301 Template Management dialog 37 templates importing 46 text bulleted or numbered list 136 outline level 137 pasting 136 text boundaries show hide 280 text box AutoLayout 134 137 text documents opening 305 Text For
243. heet4 Sheet SheetS f SheetS Sheet 3 8 Figure 71 Sheet tab arrows Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you wish The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 71 only appear if you have some Note sheet tabs that are hidden by the horizontal scrollbar Otherwise they will appear faded as in Figure 60 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 87 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side of Figure 69 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the Shift key use the cur
244. hen creating PDF files Security options Remove personal information on saving Recommend password protection on saving W Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks OK a Figure 290 Security options and warnings dialog Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 279 Ctri click required to follow hyperlinks In older versions of OpenOffice org clicking on a hyperlink in a document opened the linked document Now you can choose whether to keep this behavior by unchecking this box Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory Appearance options Writing editing and especially page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins text boundaries the boundaries of tables and sections in Writer documents page breaks in Calc grid lines in Draw or Writer and other features In addition you might prefer to use colors that are different from AOO s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the OpenOffice org Appearance page you can speci
245. hen select either From file or Scan e Alternatively and after inserting a new slide click the Insert Picture icon and select the file from the nsert Picture dialog that opens To see a preview of the ao picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert Picture dialog Figure 122 e Move the picture to the desired location The picture will resize itself to fill the area of the contents box Follow the directions in the Caution note below when manually resizing a graphic Insert picture D Profiles rgs02c My Documents My Pictures 5 06 20 2006 21 310 A _ eal ned20qi jpa Graphics jpg 5779 Bytes 07 05 2006 20 39 06 eal republican jpg Graphics pa 723KB 06 08 2006 18 01 4 eal s2_01jpg Graphics jpg 3043 Bytes 04 16 2006 18 45 5 E3 n_005_jpg jpq Graphics ipa 1877 Bytes 06 10 2006 04 29 11 sl United States gif Graphics gif 4086 Bytes 04 11 2006 22 03 ils 1 pad File name lincaln_creek_rest_photo jpg Style Gas o o o ooo M File type lt All formats ll formats gt lt All formats gt bmp bmp dxf emt emt neeps Gi gnt Jpg I jpeg _ Link Preview Figure 122 Insert picture dialog When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the Caution context menu and make sure that Keep ratio is selected Then adjust the height or width to the size you need As you adjust one dimension
246. hether to include a particular artist in our query or not is equal to the same as is not equal to not the same as is smaller than comes before is greater than comes after is equal or less than the same as or comes before is equal or greater than the same as or comes after like similar to in some way Note These conditions apply to numbers letters using the alphabetical order and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select CD Collection Artist in the Fields list and is equal to as the Condition 3 Type the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 207 Note Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping conditions are not needed Steps 5 and 6 of the wizard are skipped in our query Step 7 Assign aliases if desired We want the default settings Click Next Step 8 Overview Name the query Suggestion Query_Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as difficult as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel econ
247. hod to choose The best layout method varies depending on what the final document should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples For a book similar to this user guide with one column of text some figures without text beside ee them and some other figures with descriptive text f a use page styles for basic layout and tables to place a figures beside descriptive text when necessary Items fomatted as A table Whetdom Ones og iclude Tse Se eed ee amp b rA Bad a ee 66 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started For an index or other document with two columns of Title is ina text where the text continues from the left hand single column to the right hand column and then to the column next page all in sequence also known as snaking section columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column section For a newsletter with complex layout two or three leca columns on the page and some articles that header on l a continue from one page to some place several the first page honena pages later use page styles for basic layout Place only articles in linked frames and anchor graphics to fixed positions on the page if necessary This frame is linked to a frame on another page These frames are not linked to other frames For a document with terms
248. ible report would list the totals for each expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came from to pay the expenses The best way to create reports like these is to create the queries needed to gather the needed data insert the query data into a spreadsheet and use the necessary Calc functions on this data We will create two reports one listing the expenses each day other than fuel and the second listing the fuel costs each day Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 213 The fields we need for the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Miscellaneous This report will not require an additional query The second report involves the Fuel table Since this table includes fuel purchases at times other than during the vacation we need to create a query that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation Vacations table report To create a new report 1 Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 163 2 Inthe Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard opens Step 1 Field selection 1 Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries dropdown list 2 Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Click Next Tables or queries
249. icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 2 Navigator He ka i S C Fae Headings 58 Tables Text frames GY Graphics lab GLE objects se Bookmarks Sections e Hyperlinks References Y Indexes Comments GY Draw objects 0101GS3 IntroducingOOo0_GS JHW 2009 w Figure 15 The Navigator e Click the Navigation icon O second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Figure 16 Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previous and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes which can be difficult to see The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Figure 16 Navigation toolbar A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or clic
250. icon on the Relation Design window 2 On the Add Tables dialog use either of these ways to add a table to the Relation Design window Double click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 3 Click Close to close the Add Tables dialog when you have added the tables you want Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 183 4 You can define the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables in two ways e Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Vacations E Fuel UO 7 Date 7 FuellD a n E Odometer Breakfast FuelCost a FuelQuanity Pac Pirla ratar Figure 164 Designation for a 1 n relationship Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure 165 Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section Inthe Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Fuel label Select Date from the Fuel table list Click in the cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Vacations table Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 165 Click OK Tables involved Fuel Y Vacations al Fields involved Vacations Date Date Figure 165 Se
251. ide or show them on the toolbar Visible Buttons Load URL Customize Toolbar New Dock Toolbar aia Nen Dagene From Template Dock All Toolbars Open cae a Lock Toolbar Position save Visible icons Close Toolbar ll Save As Documents E mail A Edit File Figure 8 Selection of visible toolbar icons Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph graphic or other object A context menu will pop up Often the context menu is the fastest and an easier way to reach a function If you are not sure where a function is located in the menus or toolbars you can often find it by right clicking Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 21 Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace It provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some features It is similar in Writer Calc Impress and Draw although each component includes some component specific items Page 3 14 Default English USA INSRAT STD Page number Page style Language Insert Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 9 Left end of status bar in Writer Outline Numbering Level 2 B OG EG 6 e O 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Information lay out slider percent Figure 10 Right end of status bar in Writer Common status bar items are described below Page sheet or slide number Shows the cur
252. ies page you can choose whether to keep any macros in Microsoft Office documents that are opened in OpenOffice org Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP Load Basic code if Save original Basic code Microsoft Excel 97 2000 4P W Load Basic code Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP 7 Load Basic code z Save original Basic code Figure 297 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e f you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in AOO but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e f you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is saved in an AOO document but is not retained if you save into a Microsoft Office format e If you are importing a Microsoft Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas normally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed 284 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding OpenOffice org OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into AOO
253. ighted in Figure 108 to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same 136 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started In text boxes created automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles available are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create
254. ils They are Strictly for on screen use and do not print 108 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Figure 97 Outline group controls The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if outline groups are nested the controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data gt Group and Outline gt Ungroup To remove all groups on a sheet select Data gt Group and Outline gt Remove Filtering which cells are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data gt Filter submenu Automatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and are useful with text and with numbers because the list includes every unique entry in the selected cells In addition to these unique entries automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter The automatic filters are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regular expressions so you cannot use them to display cell contents that are similar but not identical Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as
255. in Figure 153 Number of copies Placement x axis 0 50cm axis 0 50cm Default Angle 10 degrees Enlargement Width Height Colors Start End Figure 152 Duplicating an object Figure 153 Result of duplication Cross fading Cross fading transforms a shape from one form to another The result is a new group of objects including the start and end points and the intermediate steps To carry out a cross fade first select two objects hold the Shift key while selecting each object in turn and then choose Edit gt Cross fading 168 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started On the Cross fading dialog choose the number of increments transition steps You probably want to have Cross fade attributes and Same orientation both checked The end result is shown in Figure 155 Cross fading Settings Increments Cross fade attributes Same orientation Figure 154 Choosing cross fading settings Figure 155 Cross fading example Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can combine drawing objects together in two distinct ways grouping and combining These two methods allow you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape Grouping is like putting objects in a container You can move them as a group and apply global changes to them A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be manipulated separately A combination is
256. in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the Note ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected T1568 4 63 9 4895x290 Information Position Unsaved Digital changes signature Figure 133 Left end of the Draw status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default Oe 75 d Slide Page Zoom slider Zoom number style percent Figure 134 Right end of Draw status bar Toolbars To display or hide the various Draw toolbars choose View gt Toolbars On the menu that appears select which toolbars you want to display For more about working with toolbars see Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice in this book The tools available in the Draw toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary depending on your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is the same for all Apache OpenOffice components and is not described in detail in this chapter wo Bos el oe PSs ES be JR Q Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object See page 164 for details ai amp h poom M eack amp color leues
257. information see Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw in this book the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the Impress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of spreadsheets in Calc and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet or even better in a native Impress table Alternatively choose Insert gt Object gt OLE Object from the menu bar This opens a spreadsheet in the middle of the slide and the menus and toolbars change to those used in Calc so that you can start adding data though you may first need to resize the visible area on the slide You can also insert an already existing spreadsheet and use the viewport to select the data that you want to display on your slide Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such Writer documents Math formulas or even another presentation For details on using these objects refer to Chapter 7 of the mpress Guide Working with master pages and styles A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slides It is similar to a page style in Writer and it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A slide show can have more than one slide master Apache OpenOffice uses th
258. ing Connector toolbar by clicking on the arrow next to the Connector icon ls For more about connectors and gluepoints see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Drawing geometric shapes Geometric shapes include basic shapes symbol shapes block arrows flowcharts callouts and stars You can add text to all these shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details Figure 148 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons referred to in the following sections Clicking on the arrow next to the icon opens a floating toolbar with the relevant work tools The use of all these tools is similar to that of the Rectangle tool even though they produce different geometric shapes Tip mM P amp Figure 148 Part of the main Drawing toolbar Basic shapes The Basic Shapes icon makes available the range of tools for Basic Shapes mas drawing basic shapes including a rectangular tool identical to the eo one on the main toolbar h V E F De F 160 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Symbol shapes The Symbol Shapes icon provides an array of tools for symbol Shapes uae drawing the various symbols Qk pe VB S oF Gti TE E Block arrows The Block Arrows icon 7 opens the Block Arrows toolbar Block Arrows x gt ff tef b Ib a gt bL Y op gt gt pba Gaooeh
259. ing Started with Calc 85 Using the Tab and Enter keys e Pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus to the right or to the left respectively a te 2 p B1 C10 gt Fe Sas ceveerene Figure 69 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the direction of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up One complete screen e Combinations of Control and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways See the Help or Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts in the Calc Guide for details Tip Use one of the four A t Arrow key combinations to resize a cell Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt General The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right hand side of Figure 70 It can move the focus down right up or left Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered setting a different direction can be useful Th
260. ing it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation style is consistent and does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar GS and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If you are pasting the text into an AutoLayout area you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text to give it the same look and feel as the rest of the presentation 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will ina minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar highl
261. inus sign to insert a non breaking hyphen To enter en and em dashes you can use the Replace dashes option on the Options tab under Tools gt AutoCorrect Options This option replaces two hyphens under certain conditions with the corresponding dash is an en dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using Type at least one character a space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is anem dash that is a dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using Type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash See the Help for more details For other methods of inserting dashes see the Writer Guide 58 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you have defined Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs using the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent icons on the Formatting toolbar as well as indentation of parts of a paragraph by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Using the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you share documents with other people If you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spaci
262. ion of the handling of curves and filled curves see Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Writing text Use the Text tool T to write text and select the font color size and other attributes Click at the location where you want to position the text or click and drag to create a larger text frame Press Enter to move the cursor to the next line When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame Double click on the text at any time to edit it When you use the Text tool the Text formatting toolbar is visible it includes the usual paragraph attributes indents first line and tab stops You can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Select Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To style parts of the text use direct formatting with the toolbar Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the object Use the Callout tool g located on the Drawing toolbar to create callouts also known as captions or figure labels If you double click on an object or press F2 or the Text icon in the Drawing toolbar when an object is selected text is written in the center of the object and remains within the object N
263. ird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and signature validation see About Digital Signatures in the Apache OpenOffice Help To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Digital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 Inthe Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Removing personal data You may wish to ensure that personal data versions notes hidden information or recorded changes are removed from files before you send them to other people or create PDFs from them In Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Security gt Options you can set Apache OpenOffice to remind warn you when files contain certain information and remove personal information automatically on saving To remove personal and some other data from a file go to File gt Properties On the General tab uncheck Apply user data and then click the Reset button This removes any names in the created and modified fields deletes the modi
264. isible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 213 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Quanity Begin End Fuel Economy End Reading End Reading Fuel Figure 213 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 214 Quanity Begin End End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 hfe 704 2 1 f4 5 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 214 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuellD fields from the table and query so we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a field that does not need to be seen Remove the check in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 215 Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel able Figure 215 Making a field invisible in a query run 5 Rerun the query Figure 216 Quanity Begin End Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 vim 04 2 f4 5 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 200 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 207 1 13 67 Figure 216 Query run with aliases Step 10 Close
265. it some PDF files No vendor lock in Apache OpenOffice uses OpenDocument an XML eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about Apache OpenOffice its mission history licensing and other organizational information on the Apache OpenOffice website http www openoffice org What you see may be different Apache OpenOffice runs on Windows Linux and Mac OS X operating systems each of which has several versions and can be customized by users fonts colors themes window managers The pictures in this book were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems Some pictures will therefore not look exactly like what you see on your computer Preface 11 Using Apache OpenOffice on a Mac Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The table below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this book For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows or Linux Mac equivalent Effect Tools gt Options OpenOffice org gt Preferences Access set
266. iter 57 Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example ecno are all special characters To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Special Character to open the Special Characters dialog 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Note Different fonts include different special characters If you do not find a particular special character try changing the Font selection Special Characters Times New Roman J Subset Greek A H NEST GACIRSENENEAENESES A M N o m P T e x eter Tete felts fate uty 0 Be Delete i S AJ JE HOHE BOGE ROGGE ANODE rs fe a fe JEMAL b B b 2 FO E characters apy s Figure 45 The Special Characters dialog where you can insert special characters Inserting dashes and non breaking spaces and hyphens To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press Control Shift spacebar after the first word to insert a non breaking space In cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line for example in a number such as 123 4567 you can press Control Shift m
267. iver s license every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy can be calculated with a query What fields fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscellaneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch supper and snacks seem to fit Do list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch supper and total cost of snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odometer reading and payment type How will use this information about these three fie
268. izing Apache OpenOffice for more information Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the following choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File gt Wizards gt type of template required See Figure 28 2 Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard This process is slightly different for each type of template but the format is very similar 3 Inthe last section of the wizard you can specify the name and location for saving the template The default location is your user templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 41 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window H 4 New b Eg ABC a a g C3 2 L PRA DejaVu Serif Recent Documents Wizards Letter E Close s Fax Save Ctri s
269. k Me Figure 124 Available master pages slides masters Creating a slide master You can create a new slide master is similar to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by selecting View gt Master gt Slide Master and the Master View toolbar opens You can also right click on the slide master in the Master Pages 142 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started section of the tasks pane and select Edit Master to open the Master View toolbar On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon highlighted in is 125 Master View ty I close Master View Figure 125 Master View toolbar A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new slide master right click on the Slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the pop up menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal slide editing mode Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane make sure the Master Pages section is showing Figure 124 To apply one of the slide masters to all slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 Inthe Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 Inthe Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click App
270. k on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header You can also press Contro A to select the entire sheet Select All E 2 Figure 72 Select All box Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple sheets at times when you want to make changes to many sheets at once Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white see Figure 73 Multiple contiguous sheets To select multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first desired sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the sheet tab for the last desired sheet 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click any one of the sheet tabs and choose Select All Sheets from the pop up menu Chapter 4 Getting S
271. k the Undo icon E on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit gt Undo from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone see below for an example from Writer 28 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started File View Insert Format Table Undo Typing Fox Ctrl Z Redo Delete Fox Ctrl Y Figure 17 Edit gt Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time SOMENTE EAE Actions to undo 1 eiTyping rabbit Typing 1 Typing Fox Figure 18 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Control Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes Apache OpenOffice remembers choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory and in the Undo section change Number of steps Be aware that asking Apache OpenOffice to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 29 30 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create
272. l sheet tabs d Release the Control key when all required sheets are selected 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a selection of cells 1 Inthe document select the section of cells to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Selected cells option 4 Click the Print button Caution After printing be sure to deselect the extra sheets If you keep them selected the next time you enter data on one sheet you enter data on all the selected sheets This might not be what you want Impress and Draw You can choose individual slides ranges of slides or selections of slides for printing Range and copies All slides Number of copies 1 O Slides 1 5 l mu Selection Collate BE roe Print Slides per page Order Left to right then down Printing an individual slide 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slide to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slide to print 3 Click the Print button 238 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slides to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the
273. layed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing You can open files from the Web by typing a URL in the File name field on the Open dialog 26 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Save as C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis WeberiMy Documents openOr Published drafts Title Type E 010165 WhatIsOoa odk OpenDocument Text FS 010265 StartingoOo odt OpenDocument Text ai 0103655 FileManagement odt OpenDocument Text G 0104 35 Menus ndToolbars od OpenDocument Text FS D10565 5ettingUpoOo odt OpenDocument Text FS D10665 GettingStartedwithwr OpenDocument Text FS 0107G5 GettingStartedwithCal OpenDocument Text File name 010365 FileManagement File type SpenDacument Text todt OpenDocument Text adt OpenDocument Text Template ott OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document 5x0 Size 29 1 KB 437 4 KB 450 9 KB 305 6 KE sb KB 1 66 MB 691 4 KB _ Save with passwo OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 P doch Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtF Starwriter 5 0 sci Starwriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 14 The OpenOffice org Save As dialog Using the Navigator The Navigator lists objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Date modified 02 08 2005 17 01 54 1910712005 20 45 00 30 09 2005 10 42 58 19072005 20 402 07108 2005 08 09 25 21 07 2005 15 39 55 19 07 2005 19 45 54
274. ld you want to move and click the up or down arrow Select the fields columns for your query Tables Available fields Fields in the Query CollectionID CD Collection Artist Format CD Collection AlbumTitle Notes CD Collection DatePurchased NumberoflTracks Photo A V Figure 199 First page of the Query Wizard Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point Which field is most important 206 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important 1 2 3 4 Sort by Ascending C Descending Then by Ascending Descending Figure 200 Sorting order page Click the first Sort by dropdown list Click CD Collection Artist to select it e To list the artists in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right Click the second Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection ArtistTitle and select Ascending Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions The search conditions allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide w
275. lds While on vacation want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database 174 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the primary key In Tip some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other tables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created Creating a new database To create a new database choose File gt New gt Database from the menu bar or click the arrow next to the New icon on the Standard toolbar and select Database from the drop down menu Both methods open the Database Wizard On the first page of the Database Wizard select Create a new database and then click Next The second page has two questions Make sure the choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Click Finish Note If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the other AO
276. le Edit View Insert Format Heading 2 Heading 5 Figure 20 The Apply Style list on the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example in Writer Contro 0O applies the Text body style Contro 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Contro 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 11 Setting up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice for instructions Modifying styles Apache OpenOffice provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and custom styles that you create e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template l Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To Tip change styles in more than one document you need to change the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 37 34 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Updating a sty
277. le from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 Inthe document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a style Caution Make sure that there are unique properties in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles that particular property will remain the same as before 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not double click then long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style Styles and Formatting VEE O D 5 je Complimentary dose i ts New Style from Selection Default Detall TEE First line indent Update Style Hanging indent Load Styles Heading a Figure 21 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer page of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting toa paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself Tip If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your document be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another document See Copying and moving styles on page 37 Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templa
278. lected fields in a relationship 5 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a menu b Select Edit to open the Relations dialog Figure 166 Update options Delete options J No action J No action Update cascade Delete cascade Set null C Set null Set default Set default OK Cancel Help Figure 166 Update options and Delete options section c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade 184 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started e Click OK to close the Relations dialog and choose File gt Save to save the Relation Design window While these options are not strictly necessary they do help Having them selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the language of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing Thursday April 12 2007 gt Fuel Purchases Fuel Cost FuelQuanity 11 650 PaymentType Kevin of Figure 167 Fields of a simple form Figure 168 Simple form with additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table Figure 167 More complex forms can contain much more including additional text gra
279. lected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Group the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 267 Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the same options from the pop up menu The pop up menu also provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here On the Position and Size dialog you can enter precise values concerning size and position For more information on all of these menu options see the Draw Guide Using the 3D Settings toolbar If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the options on the 3D Settings toolbar You can also change a 2D Fontwork object into a 3D object or change a 3D object into a 2D object by clicking the Extrusion On Off icon on the 3D Settings toolbar For more information see the Draw Guide 3D Settings x MICLEA S l I Extrusion Depth 3D On Off Direction Color Tilt Down Up Lighting Surface Left Right Figure 277 3D Settings toolbar Moving and resizing Fontwork objects When you select a Fontwork object eight colored squares known as handles
280. left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Lu neh z Tolls ma E Figure 174 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a drag icon Drag the group of controls to where you want them When either changing size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Your controls Tip will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves You should also have both rulers active View gt Ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change to a double headed arrow 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a p
281. lengths But for a better appearance changes will be made to these as well 6 Replace all the fields whose label ends in Payment with a list box containing the entries from the Payment Type table 7 Lengthen the Note field vertically add a scroll bar and move tt 8 Make changes in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform that are similar to the changes in the main form 9 Add headings for each group in the main form 10 Change the background to a picture then modify some of the labels so that they can be read clearly Change the font color of the headings Here are some methods that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control other times we want to work with only the label or the field and there are times when we want to work with a group of controls e Clicking a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles You can then drag and drop it where you want 188 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Figure 172 A selected control e Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field You can press the Tab key to change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Tolls Figure 173 Selecting a field of a control e Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top
282. ll just keep going and goir This cell is set to wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 90 Automatic text wrap Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctrl Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 91 shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 103 This line contains manual line breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on C Figure 91 Cell with manual line breaks Shrinking text to fit the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 89 Figure 92 shows the results 2 3 The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog Tie qaik brow te amps over the cycle 4 Figure 92 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several different number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon ah Mj ea A Fe 8 Figure 93 Number format icons Left to right cu
283. ly four tabs Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 289 AutoCorrect Replacements and exceptions For language English Australia Replace Exceptions Options Localized Options Word Completion Ld Use replacement table Correct Two IMitial CApitals Capitalize First letter of every sentence Automatic bold and underline _ URL Recognition Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces pple numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apple Styles Remove blank paragraphs Replace Custom Styles Replace bullets with Combine sinale line oaraaraohs if lenoth oreater than SO ad e M Replace while modifying existing text T QutoFormathaukoCorrect while typing Figure 305 The AutoCorrect dialog in Writer showing the five tabs and some of the choices Customizing Apache OpenOffice You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in OpenOffice org add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the OpenOffice org website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a template To do so first Note save them in a document and then save the document as a t
284. ly see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt if you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods x1s and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with Apache OpenOffice you can also open these files by double clicking on them Saving a document To save a new document do one of the following e Press Control S e Choose File gt Save from the menu bar e Click the Save button on the main toolbar When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name verify the file type if applicable and click Save To save an open document with the current file name choose File gt Save This will overwrite the last saved state of the file Password protection To protect an entire document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password 1 On the Save As dialog select the Save with password option and then click Save You will receive a prompt Figure 12 2 Type the same password in both fields and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not match you receive an error message Close the message box to return to the Set Password dialog and enter the password again Caution Apache OpenOffice uses
285. ly to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need to mix multiple slide masters that may belong to different templates For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the presentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on the hard disk The Slide Design dialog makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or from the pop up menu that appears when right clicking on a slide in the Slides pane x Slide Design Select a slide design a Cancel Help Default W Exchange background page Load C Delete unused backgrounds Figure 126 Slide Design Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 143 The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button 2 Select in the Load Slide Design dialog Figure 127 the template from which to load the slide master and click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection r Categories Templates Business Correspondence Forms and Contracts Presentation Backgrounds Presentations The slide masters you have loaded will al
286. m To add other dictionaries be sure you are connected to the Internet and then use Tools gt Language gt More Dictionaries Online AOO will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Follow the prompts to select and install the ones you want Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that AOO uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings P OpenOffice org b Load Save Language Settings Language Settings Languages Writing Aids b OpenOffice org Base This is where you make settings p Charts with OpenOffice org Figure 300 Language Setting Options On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page Figure 296 change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English UK has been chosen for all the appropriate settings If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the option labelled For the current document only If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Urdu Thai Hebrew and Arabic If you choose ei
287. m percentage opens the zoom and layout dialog You can hide the information in the Status Bar by selecting View gt Status Bar from the main menu Navigator The Navigator displays all objects contained in a document It provides another convenient way to move around a document and find items in it To display the Navigator click its icon 2 on the Standard toolbar choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar or press Ctr l Shift F5 The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides and objects pictures soreadsheets and so on meaningful names instead of leaving them as the default Slide 1 and Shape 2 x Navigator Sa 7 Da Shape 1 Da Shape 2 v e Default Example Da Shape 1 fa Shape v e Shapes Da Shape 1 fa Shape fa Shape 3 SamplePresentation i Figure 106 Navigator B Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 123 Workspace views Each of the workspace views is designed to ease the completion of certain tasks it is therefore useful to familiarize yourself with them in order to quickly accomplish those tasks Each Workspace view displays a different set of tooloars when selected These Note toolbar sets can be customized by going to View gt Toolbars then check or uncheck the toolbar you want to add or remove Normal view Normal view is the main view for working with individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects To place a slid
288. matting toolbar 136 text in Draw 159 text tool 134 theme deleting 259 themes 257 themes Gallery 259 toolbars 122 adding commands 295 choosing icons for commands 295 Color Bar 152 creating 294 Index 315 customizing 21 displaying or hiding 19 Draw 151 Drawing 152 Fontwork 263 Line and Filling toolbar 151 moving 20 Options Bar Draw 152 overview 19 show or hide icons 21 tooltips 132 271 track changes 74 transparency 166 167 two digit years 271 typing errors autocorrect 98 U undo change 28 undoing groups 169 ungrouping 169 unit of measurement 150 unsaved changes flag 51 user data options 270 user interface options 273 user interface parts of 13 user specific settings 283 V validating cell contents Calc 101 VBA properties load save options 284 vector graphics 149 vertical block of text select 55 view options 273 W wildcards 56 windows dockable floating 20 wizard form database 185 presentation 128 query database 206 report database 214 table database 176 workspace Draw 149 Writer document views 52 features 49 Navigation icons 53 Navigation toolbar 52 status bar 50 workspace 49 zoom 52 X XML 284 Y year two digits 271 Z zoom 52 316 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started
289. me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Accessing a spreadsheet as a data source Accessing a spreadsheet is similar to accessing other databases 1 Choose File gt New gt Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type 3 Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next 4 Ifthe spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next Using this method of accessing a spreadsheet you cannot change anything in the spreadsheet You can only view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet Note All changes in a spreadsheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself using Calc After modifying the spreadsheet and saving it you will see the changes in the database If you create and save an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it Registering odb databases Databases created by OO02 x or later are in the odb OpenDocument Base format Other programs can also produce databases in this format Registered a odb database is simple 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Base gt Databases 2 Under Registered databases click New
290. mited to predefined information To validate new data entered by a user select a cell and use Data gt Validity to define the type of contents that can be entered in that cell For example a cell might require a date or a whole number with no alphabetic characters or decimal points or a cell may not be left empty Depending on how validation is set up the tool can also define the range of contents that can be entered and provide help messages that explain the content rules you have set up for the cell and what users should do when they enter invalid content You can also set the cell to refuse invalid content accept it with a warning or start a macro when an error is entered See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for more information Editing data Editing data is done in much the same way as entering data The first step is to select the cell containing the data to be edited Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Backspace key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Delete key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit gt Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog From this dialog the different
291. n Still apply a style of your choice later With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Table The Table toolbar offers many of the same icons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below After the table is created you can modify it in much the same way as you would modify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 3 of the Impress Guide and Chapter 9 of the Writer Guide By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly change the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is
292. n HTML page 286 Impress content boxes 132 features 119 font resizing 136 main window 120 inclination 164 indents 59 indexes and bibliographies 71 Insert Bookmark dialog 77 Insert Picture dialog 253 Internet options 289 J Java options 281 Java Runtime Environment JRE 173 JRE Java Runtime Environment 16 281 K keyboard shortcuts assigning 297 customizing 297 loading from a file 299 resetting to default values 299 saving to a file 299 L landscape pages 47 language settings 287 language support 11 layout methods 66 limits to sum integral 229 Line and Filling tooloar 151 line properties 165 line customizing 166 line drawing 156 lines editing 165 linking object from gallery 256 Linux Quickstarter 18 system requirements 16 list table database 183 load Basic code to edit 284 load save options 282 loading styles 38 locale settings 287 M Mac OS X system requirements 16 macro security options 279 312 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started mail merge 74 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing Writer document 249 margins 150 margins Writer 69 Master Pages 142 master slides 133 141 mathematical equations 221 mathematical markup 224 mathematical symbols 221 matrix markup Math 230 measurement unit 59 memory options 272 menu bar 19 menus adding commands 293 creating 291 customizing 290 modifying 292 modifying entries 293 Microsoft Office file conversion 285 Microsoft Windows file associa
293. n and Save dialogs in illustrations Print dialogs Use OpenOffice org dialogs Mac OS X only To use the standard Print dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option When this option is selected the Print dialogs supplied with OpenOffice org will be used This book uses the AOO Print dialogs in illustrations Document status If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 271 Memory options In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Memory Undo I Number of steps 100 Graphics cache Use for OpenOffice org g MB Memory per object 24 MB Remove from memory after 00 10 H hh mm Cache for inserted objects Number of objects 20 OpenOffice org Quickstarter W Load OpenOffice org during system start up Figure 281 Choosing Memory options for the OpenOffice org applications These options
294. n the Control key and double clicking Repeat this procedure to dock the Gallery again Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 257 The default themes are locked no items can be added to or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new themes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 259 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add images to the built in themes indicated by an icon of another color Method 1 selecting a file 1 Right click on the desired theme and select Properties from the context menu 2 Inthe theme s Properties dialog go to the Files page and click the Find Files button ew Thane 35 Backgrounds i Bullets Homepac Delete Rename Properties of My Theme pases aed General Files Properties Oe File type Al Files gt EA lt No Files gt Figure 267 Gallery Properties dialog 3 The Select path dialog not shown
295. naries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 oe D French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte A Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates For professional and stunning looking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2008 07 01 Teninlate Channer 175 Get more extensions online Check for Updates Figure 30 Newly added package of templates Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 43 Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File gt New gt Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu Apache OpenOffice creates the document from the Default template for that type of document You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 Inthe box on the left select the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button
296. nd choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection LJ Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current a sheet has been protected Protecte Select Protect Document from the Tools menu _ Hide formula mary SEE Print _ Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 96 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simplify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data gt Group and Outline gt AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set outline groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then choosing Data gt Group and Outline gt Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data gt Outline gt Hide Deta
297. neral tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes General Data Events Alignment 00 c0000 Left o Background color SE e OxO00DDDDDD Can Border eeeceseceeeseceeee 3Dlook look Line count Dropdown Multiselection Default selection E Additional information Help taxt s0nunennnnnannns feta eae een eee ene rn ee Figure 179 Dropdown list open to reveal choices 192 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 5 Click the Data tab Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql General Data Events Data field Type of list contents List content ogl Native Tablefields Figure 180 Type of list contents dropdown list Type the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Ge neral Data Events Data field BPayment Type of listcontents Sql_ y List content Bound field S LECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Figure 181 List content for payment type fields What you wrote is called an SQL command The words SELECT and FROM are written in capital letters because they are commands When the command SELECT is Note used it requires a field name within quotation marks and then the field s alias also within quotation marks In this case the field
298. ng tabbed material will change to use the other person s settings This may cause major formatting problems Instead of using the defaults define your own tab settings as described in this section To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog A better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph style See Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide for more information Ti Using tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended Depending on p what you are trying to accomplish a table is usually a better choice Changing the default tab stop interval Any changes to the default tab setting will affect the existing default tab stops in Note any document you open afterward as well as tab stops you insert after making the change To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop intervals go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General settings Measurement unit inch EA Tab stops 0 50 a Figure 46 Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measurement unit for rulers in the current document by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units Click on one of them
299. ng the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions This can be very useful because it also shows how the functions are formatted Function wizard Input line Figure 62 Formula Bar In a spreadsheet the term function covers much more than just mathematical functions See Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more details Clicking the Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells above the current cell If there are no numbers above the current cell then the cells to the left are placed in the Sum formula Clicking the Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input line thereby enabling the cell to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons x y The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the Input line which forms the remainder of the Formula Bar You can edit the contents of the current cell on the Input line or in the cell itself To edit on the Input line click in the line then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a column and a row At the top of the columns and at the left end of the rows are a series of gray box
300. nged to the Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect Options to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine AutoCorrect is turned on when Writer is installed To turn it off uncheck Format gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing To stop Writer replacing a specific spelling go to the Replace tab highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to the list type it into the Replace and With boxes on the Replace tab and click New See the different tabs of the dialog for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect Tip AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special characters For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special characters Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing To turn off Word Completion select Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Word Completion and deselect Enable word completion You can customize word completion from the Word Completion page of the AutoCorrect dialog e Add append a space automatically after an accepted word e Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as you type e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word compl
301. nges Pall E Fan Date modified 5 05 MB 05 06 2011 16 07 34 Title Type Size PLOSO884 JPG Graphics jpq P1030885 JPG P1030886 JPG P1030887 JPG Graphics jpg Graphics jpg Graphics jpg Graphics jpg 3 21 MB 3 42 MB 5 08 MB 5 02 MB 05 06 2011 16 10 44 05 06 2011 16 11 00 05 06 2011 16 11 46 05 06 2011 16 33 54 P1O30888 JPG 4 96 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 02 4 59 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 06 4 80 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 12 4 91 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 18 Graphics jpq l P1030891 JPG Graphics jpq i l P1OSO892 1PG Graphics ipa File name P1030890 JPG Style Graphics File type lt All formats gt bmp dxf emf eps gif jpg j Link 4 Preview Figure 263 Insert picture dialog Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected Apache OpenOffice creates a link to the file containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage e Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the d
302. ngs as in Figure 195 7 Click OK Save the document Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to enter data in a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates records in the spreadsheet just like they are done in creating a form ina database While you can directly access the data in the spreadsheet cells you can only see the data in the records created in the spreadsheet Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells uses the Data to Text icon as we did to make a table in a Writer document But differences exist in these two situations The steps are straightforward 202 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left of your data including the column names 2 Use F4 to open the database source window and select the table whose data you want to use 3 Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted e To select multiple rows hold down the Control key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted e To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted 4 Click the Data to text icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells 5 Save the spreadsheet Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have
303. nmeriesetuavieessmecsearstieameen 155 TNG Darie RN SNAPE S eseria e rn a N E 155 Draving geomet SMAP eeeeenaen een ote mete recente eee ter ree iana 160 ey cl clei ge O cle apeeMe ne een ane een ene eer ee ee ee eee ere eee eee nee eee 161 Moving and dynamically adjusting AN ODjECt S SIZE ce ccceccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeees 163 ECPI ass eg E TE Gone E E a ei a 164 EEEE e EEE AE A A E E E A A A OE A E E T A 166 EEE 6 ene eee ee eee T ee ee ee en eee EAE eee ae eee 166 Combining multiple QO SENS oi ccc cadicainotwciasermeerdameasacuenmesenesanestiaeieiosbaaccenseddeanedontenedeenieesadiucteneian 169 Alde SN np cers raged rsa e iiaa E a 170 Heerma and ediino MEUS Sariseu ee entered ee erent re ene PORE one Reem renner eerie rennet ere 170 IM a a EA E eres EEE sete denne TE E EE E A A T 170 EON E E E A 171 Adding comments to a draWiNG sssrini urke NENA EES aE ia NEEE 171 Chapter 7 GENG Saed wih BASO aa 173 E oer EE E ETE ER S 173 P a a ne E cee re enc E eee 174 Piee EEA AE Ee E E e E A E A A E E A A A E N 175 Creating database TADIES s 5 cccasscncsecessntecatynsaeeewwesenecdves pascawed sbcedwscuiednctaniiSsens sontecanpneecasseeaioseene 176 Denning BST V UG sessirnar onni i enaA AE nA i aa arei 183 Creating a databas t TOM ee eee tee as Serie teh ERa eee ee EASA EDn 185 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 5 Accessing Other data SOUICES ccccceeccseecseecseeceeeceeeceeccueeseeesuecaue
304. ns To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key 148 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw Vector Drawing in Apache OpenOffice What is Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program although it can also perform some operations on raster graphics pixels Using Draw you can quickly create a wide variety of graphical images Vector graphics store and display an image as simple geometric elements such as lines circles and polygons rather than a collections of pixels points on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image Draw is fully integrated into the Apache OpenOffice suite and this simplifies exchanging graphics with all components of the suite For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting the image You can also work with drawings directly from within Writer or Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw Draw s functionality is extensive even though it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications it possesses more functions than most drawing tools that are integrated with office productivity suites A few examples of drawing functions are e Layer management e Magnetic grid point system e Dimensions and measurement display e Connectors for making organization charts e 3D functions that enable small three dimen
305. nsecutive rows click the gray box to the left of the top desired row and Shift click the bottom desired row 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 195 The Data to text icon is to the left of the Data to Fields icon in Figure 194 eq Insert Database Columns EJ Insert data as Table Fields Text Table Database columns Table column s Miscellaneous a Date MiscNotes Breakfast MiscPayment BPayment Motel Lunch MPayment LPayment Odometer SnackCost snackNo z Format From database Insert table heading General Apply column name AutoFormat Create row only Figure 195 Insert Database Columns dialog 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move the fields in the order you desire You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available e If you want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the data source table e To remove a single field from the Table Column s list click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left 5 To start over click the double arrow pointing to the left 6 Select the settings for your table Use the default setti
306. nses all at one time each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will relate these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may have more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many It is designated 1 n The Vacations table also contains several fields for the type of payment used For each field listing the payment type there is only one entry from the Payment Type table This is a one to one relationship one field in one table to one entry from the other table It is designated 1 1 Other tables also contain fields for the type of payment The relationship between the fields of those tables and the Payment Type table are also 1 1 Since the Payment Type table only provides a static list we will not be defining a relationship between the Payment Type table and the fields of the other tables which use the entries of the Payment Type table That will be done when the forms are created The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they share similar fields Date and Odometer As you create your own databases you need to also determine where tables are related and how Tip 1 To begin defining relationships choose Tools gt Relationships The Automobile OpenOffice org Base Relation Design window opens and the Add Tables dialog pops up You can also open it by clicking the Add Tables
307. nstructions on printing slides handouts and notes Select from the main menu Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time and in the dialog box that opens click on the Notes and Handouts tab Use this dialog to select the elements you want to appear on each handout page and their contents More details on how to use this dialog are provided in the mpress Guide Figure 110 Handout layouts Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 125 x Header and Footer Slide Notes and Handouts maure on za T me Apply to All Header SS a Header text SSS v Date and time Fixed Variable Language ee a eee English usa e v Footer B CO _ number Figure 111 Dialog to set the page information for handouts and notes Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view contains all of the slide thumbnails Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Normal Quiine Notes Handout Slide Sorter Crag gng an igra rr Praca ritin Sh ber d ya e yn Pe i r al Slide 3 Slide 4 Figure 112 Slide Sorter view 126 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Customizing Slide Sorter view To change the number of slides per row 1 Check View gt Toolbars gt Slide Sorter and Slide View to show or hide the slide sorter and view toolbars 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 TS ga ooi a W 2slides Figure 113 Slide Sorter and Slide View toolbars Moving
308. nt Properties icon E The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in Apache OpenOffice You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document Templates and Documents Business Correspondence aie oor Title _ Business Letter 2 Business Letter 1 New Doc Business Letter 3 Business Letter 4 By P Business Letter 5 Volker Ahrendt Sun Microsystems Business Letter 6 Templates Facsimile Message 1 Date Facsimile Message 2 13 06 2008 13 00 00 z Facsimile Message 3 Facsimile Message 4 Modified by My Docu Facsimile Message 5 Volker Ahrendt Facsimile Message 6 Modified on 13 06 2008 16 00 00 Samples Drintad hw Get more templates online Figure 26 Templates and Documents window Creating a template You can create your own templates in two ways from a document and using a wizard Creating a template from a document To create a template from a document 1 Open anew or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want 3 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Save The Templates dialog opens see Figure 27 4 Inthe New template field type a name for the new template 5 Inthe Categories list
309. ntage Digital Signature Figure 105 Status bar 122 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started From left to right you will find e Information area which changes depending on the selection For example Example selection Examples of information shown Text area Text Edit Paragraph x Row y Column z Charts spreadsheets Embedded object OLE ObjectName selected Graphics Bitmap with transparency selected e Cursor position the position of the cursor or of the top left corner of the selection measured from the top left corner of the slide followed by the width and height of the selection or text box where the cursor is located e Unsaved changes an icon indicating that the file needs saving Double clicking on this flag opens the file save dialog e Digital signature an icon indicating whether the document is digitally signed After the file has been saved double clicking on this flag opens the digital signatures dialog e Slide number the slide number currently displayed in the Workspace and the total number of slides in the presentation e Page slide style the style associated with the slide handout or notes page currently in the Workspace Double clicking on the style name opens the slide design dialog e Zoom slider adjusts the zoom percentage of the Workspace displayed e Zoom percentage indicates the zoom percentage of the Workspace displayed Double clicking on zoo
310. ntally select the entire A control for use with the Properties dialog or you will apply the exact same values to both the label and field For example if you enter the values for a new position both the field and the label moves to the same position and the field is positioned on top of the label Then you have to move each of them to where you want them To open the Properties window right click a control and select Control from the pop up menu Or you can click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Note Just be careful and use Contro Z to undo any mistakes you may make Detailed instructions on how to use the Properties window will be in the Base Guide Step 6 Replace fields with other fields We want to replace the PaymentType field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of payment from the Payment Type table rather than having to manually enter the type In my case each of my payment types begins with a different letter If enter the first letter of the payment type the rest of the word automatically appears can then go to the next field 1 Control click the Payment field for Breakfast The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Breakfast Payment at eer Figure 178 Selecting a field of a control 2 Right click within the green handles and select Replace with gt List Box 3 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Properties List Box dialog 4 On the Ge
311. nterchangeable terms for this one concept Note Master Slide slide master and master page These terms all refer to a slide that is used to create other slides This guide however uses only the term Slide master except when describing the user interface Impress has included a range of slide masters found in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane You can also create and save additional slide masters or add more from other sources See Chapter 2 in the Impress Guide for information on creating and modifying slide masters If all you need to do is to change the background you can take a shortcut 1 Select Format gt Page and go to the Background tab 2 Select the desired background between solid color gradient hatching and bitmap 3 Click OK to apply it A dialog box will open asking if the background should be applied to all the slides If you click yes Impress will automatically modify the master page for you Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 133 Inserting and correctly formatting a background is beyond the scope of this Note chapter but you can find all the information you need in Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide or in Chapter 6 of the Impress Guide Modifying the slide show By default the slide show will display all the slides in the same order as they appear in the slide sorter without any transition between slides and you need some keyboard or mouse interaction to move from one slide to the next You can use
312. ntly saved starting document Figure 258 Select starting document ne Finish 2 On the second page select E mail message and click Next Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 249 Steps Select a document type 1 Select starting document what type of document do vou want to create 2 Select document type Letter 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation E Mail Message Send e mail messages to a group of recipients The e mail messages c e mail messages can be personalized For each recipient Figure 259 Select document type 3 On the third page click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list Steps Insert address block 1 Select starting document 1 Select the address list containing the address data Select Address List vou want bo use This data is needed to create the 2 Select document type address block 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation Select Address List Select an address list Click Add to select recipients From a different list IF you do not have an address list you can create one by clicking Create 6 Edit document 7 Personalize document Your recipients are currently selected From 5 Save print or send ho address tes Addresses Addresses
313. o point to an anchor ina document to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document_name anchor_name e Text type the text that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the hotspot e Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among _ blank opens in a new browser window _self opens in the active browser window top or parent Tip The value _ self for the target frame usually will work just fine It is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary Using Apache OpenOffice s drawing tools You can use Apache OpenOffice s drawing tools to create graphics such as simple diagrams using rectangles circles lines text and other predefined shapes You can also group several drawing objects to make sure they maintain their relative position and proportion You can place the drawing objects directly on a page in your document or you can insert them into a frame You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs screen captures or other illustrations produced by other programs but this is not recommended because e You cannot include images in a group with drawing objects so they may get out of alignment in your document e If you convert a document to another format such as HTML the drawing objects and the graphics will not remain associated they are saved separately In general if you need to create complex drawings it is
314. o smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply anti aliasing Menu icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts Causes the font list to look like Figure 283 Left with the font names shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their formatting Figure 283 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 273 11 B U Liberation Sans 11 A Liberation Mono Liberation Mono Liberation Sans Liberation Sans Narrow Liberation Serif Liberation Sans Ag Liberation Sans Narrow A Liberation Serif LilyUPC Ag LyuPC Linux Biolinum G AE Linux Biolinum G ER Linux Libertine Ai Linux Biolinum Linux Libertine G mM Figure 283 Font list Left With preview Right Without preview Font Lists Show font history Causes the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document are displayed at the top of the font list Otherwise fonts are shown in alphabetical order Graphics output Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display Not supported on all operating systems and AOO distributions Graphics output Use anti aliasing Enables and disables anti aliasing which makes the display
315. oar P P Flowcharts The tools for drawing flowcharts are accessed by clicking on the Flowchart xX Flowcharts icon a F The creation of flowcharts organization charts and similar planning tools are described in Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Heoedy Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide wee axe AW e S Callouts Callouts x Use the Callouts icon 5 to open the Callouts toolbar Bees E CE ET Stars and banners Stars and Banners X at WOT OM te ee eee These tools are associated with the Stars icon w7 Selecting objects Direct selection To easiest way to select an object is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click directly on the object s outline to select it Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 161 Selection by framing You can select several objects at once by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects as shown For this to work the Select icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle are selected Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected Hold down the Alt key and click where the object is located If there are several overlapping objects hold down the Alt key and click until you reach the object you want To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the Alt Shift keys The number and type of selected objects is shown at t
316. object is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 268 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object Figure 273 Editing Fontwork text 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Esc to apply your changes 264 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the 3D Settings toolbar Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 271 is visible If you do not see it go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click on the different icons to edit Fontwork objects Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the selected Fontwork aA object You can choose from a palette of shapes a l j P y a AY i O u ip Trada vw d ai aw Js aw l JOS Figure 274 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of characters in the object Toggles between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the same height Poverty FONO
317. ocations that hold the data you need for the equation A function is a predefined calculation entered in a cell to help you analyze or manipulate data All you have to do is add the arguments and the calculation is automatically made for you Functions help you create the formulas needed to get the results that you are looking for Refer to Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more information Analyzing data Calc includes several tools to help you analyze the information in your spreadsheets ranging from features for copying and reusing data to creating subtotals automatically to varying information to help you find the answers you need These tools are divided between the Tools and Data menus One of the most useful of these tools is the PivotTable called DataPilot in Calc 3 3 This is a tool for combining comparing and analyzing large amounts of data easily Using the PivotTable you can view different summaries of the source data display the details of areas of interest and create reports whether you are a beginner an intermediate or advanced user Refer to Chapter 8 in the Calc Guide for more information 110 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Other analysis options include Consolidation Data gt Consolidate provides a way to combine data from two or more ranges of cells into a new range while running one of several functions Such as Sum or Average on the data Subtotals Use Data gt Subtotals to calculate s
318. ocument Once you have created the macro in the OpenOffice org Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Export Display warning When the OpenOffice org Basic option See above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that OpenOffice org Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of the current document as well The HTML filter supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export 286 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Choosing language settings You may need to do several things to set the language settings to what you want e Install the required dictionaries e Change some locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries AOO automatically installs several dictionaries with the progra
319. ocument when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files Apache OpenOffice can handle quite large files e Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images e Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and make sure the recipient Knows where to put them on another machine so that the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolder named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name and in the same place relative to the document 254 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started When inserting the same image several times in the document it would appear Note beneficial to link rather than embed however this is not so because Apache OpenOffice embeds only one copy of the image file in the document Embedding linked images If you
320. of most graphical objects look smoother and with fewer artifacts Not Supported on all operating systems and AOO distributions Tip Press Shift Contro R to restore or refresh the view of the current document Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste or their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Function Clipboard Selection clipboard Copy content Edit gt Copy Control C Select text table or object Paste content Edit gt Paste Control V Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the cursor position pastes at the mouse pointer position Pasting into another No effect on the clipboard The last marked selection is the document contents content of the selection clipboard Selection Transparency Determines the appearance of selected text or graphics which appear on a shaded background To make the shaded background more or less dark increase or decrease the Transparency setting
321. og use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl F or choose Edit gt Find amp Replace from the menu bar Optionally click the More Options button to expand the dialog the button changes to Fewer Options 56 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 5 Find amp Replace Search for and Find All Replace with ri Replace Replace All E Match case Whole words only Fewer Options E Current selection only Attributes E Backwards E Regular expressions E Similarity search No Format E Search for Styles E Notes Figure 44 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog To use the Find amp Replace dialog 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 Toreplace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead For more information on using Find amp Replace see the Writer Guide If you click Find All Writer selects all instances of the search text in the document Similarly if you click Replace All Writer replaces all matches Tip Caution Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hilarious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Chapter 3 Getting Started with Wr
322. oice and return to the Print dialog 5 Click the Print button to print the document Tip Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Change the Apache OpenOffice settings to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Change the Writer or Calc Impress Draw settings to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print 2 Under Contents select the Print text in black option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Previewing pages sheets before printing You can use the previewing options in Writer and Calc to view the document as it will be printed Different viewing options are available Writer The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed and you can edit the pages in that view If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like Writer provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view use the Facing Pages Book Preview button on the status bar B O e _ 85 e Page Preview read only view To
323. omy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query used as part of the second query Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or Query Tables Queries CD Collection Close ose E a Maintenance Payment Type Vacations Figure 201 Add Tables or Query window 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Tip Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the fuel table Figure 202 and drag the to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Fuel ir FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 202 Fuel table in query 208 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the FuellD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Field Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion FuellD w Odometer FuelQuantity Fuel Fuel Fuel Figure 203 Query table Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want the query s FuellD to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell under FuellD in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Figure 204 Q
324. ons File formats Apache OpenOffice can open Apache OpenOffice can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth and odm Writer 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx docm dotx dotm Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd WPS 2000 Office 1 0 wps Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarWriter formats sdw sgl vor DocBook xml Unified Office Format text uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw HTML Document htm html Most of these file types are automatically detected by Apache OpenOffice so they can be opened without explicitly selecting the document type in the file picker When opening htm or html files used for web pages Apache OpenOffice customizes Writer for working with these files Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xIt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xit
325. ontinuing 144 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Cauti Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear on all ae slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides Select A View gt Normal from the menu bar or clicking Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return to the normal slide view The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style the color of the title area and so on will not be overridden by subsequent changes to the slide master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the slide master to do that select that element and choose Format gt Default Formatting from the menu bar Using a slide master to add text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar select the Text icon or press F2 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View gt Normal when you are finished The Impress slide master comes with three pre
326. ools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 314 click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog To get extensions that are listed in the repository you can open the Extension Tip Manager and click the Get more extensions here link Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 299 rman Manager og English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 oe ia French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte oe Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates For professional and stunning looking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2008 07 01 Temnlate Channer 175 Get more extensions online Check For Updates Figure 314 Using the Extension Manager Note To install a shared extension you need write access to the Apache OpenOffice installation directory Some popular extensions This section describes a few of the more important and popular extensions to Apache OpenOffice In each case yo
327. opens You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory 4 Click the Select button to start the search A list of graphic files is then displayed in the Properties dialog You can use the File type drop down list to limit the files displayed 5 To add all of the files shown in the list click Add All Otherwise select the files to add and then click Add Hold down either the Shift key or the Control key while you click on the files 258 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Method 2 drag and drop You can drag and drop an image into the Gallery from a document 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking 3 Ifthe mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the Alt key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it 4 Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the image into the document 5 Release the mouse button Deleting images from the
328. options Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 65 To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click the Edit button in the Options section Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles Manual hyphenation To manually hyphenate words do not use a normal hyphen which will remain visible even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change margins or font size Instead use a conditional hyphen which is visible only when required To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word click where you want the hyphen to appear and press Control hyphen The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts page styles columns frames tables and sections For more information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids Tip Which layout met
329. options is shown On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects For more information see the Draw Guide Line options Line icon Opens a dialog with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles 266 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Arrow Style icon Choose from the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line Area options Area icon Opens a dialog with seven tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps e Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object e Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object e Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object e Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Gradients tab Modify the available gradients or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Hatching tab Modify
330. order of the fields in the Tab Order window a Find the txtWMPayment listing near the bottom of the list and click it b Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel c Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same order as in Figure 190 Click OK Controls fmtMiscelaneous MiscPayment txtSnPayment txtMiscNotes fmtSnackCost Figure 190 Tab order for the main form 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database Creating forms and subforms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide 198 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Accessing other data sources OpenOffice org allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into AOO documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry To access a data source that is not a odb file 1 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window 2 Select Connect to an existing database Click the arrow next to the Database type field and select the database type from the drop down list Click Next 3 Click Browse and select the database Click Next 4 Accept the default settings Register the database for
331. originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 Open the document in Apache OpenOffice and choose Edit gt Links 2 The Edit Links dialog Figure 264 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded 3 Click the Break Link button 4 Save the document Note Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy you must delete and reinsert the images one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so 800 Edit Links Source file Element Type Status i eee file Use P1030890JPC lt Allformats gt Graphic Manual 3 3 file Use IMG 3038 JPC lt All formats gt Graphic Manual Help file Use P1040090 PC lt All formats gt Graphic Manual Update Modify Break Link Source file file Users jean Pictures SouthAustralia2011 FlindersRanges P1030890 JPG Element lt All formats gt Type Graphic Update Automatic Manual Figure 264 The Edit Links dialog Inserting an image from the clipboard Using the clipboard you can copy images into an AOO document from another AOO document and from other programs To do this 1 Open both the source document and the target document 2 Inthe source document select the image to be copied 3 Move the mouse pointer over the selected image and press Contro C to copy the image to the clipboard 4 Swi
332. ormatting such as bold or italic Styles are logical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text is Styles help improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy In addition styles are used by Apache OpenOffice for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given in Examples of style use on page 47 Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates 31 Apache OpenOffice supports the following types of styles e Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets e Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops line spacing and borders and can include character formatting e Character styles affect selected text within a pa
333. orter view and choose Hide Slide from the pop up menu Hidden slides are marked by a slashed slide number If you want to reorder the presentation choose Slide Show gt Custom Slide Show Click on the New button to create a new sequence of slides and save it You can have as many slide shows as you want from a single slide set Slide transitions Slide transition is the animation that is played when a slide is changed for the next slide in the presentation You can configure the slide transition from the Slide Transition drawer in the Tasks pane Select the desired transition the speed of the animation and whether the transition should Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 147 happen when you click the mouse preferred or automatically after a certain number of seconds Click Apply to all slides unless you prefer to have different transitions in the presentation l The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select Tip its checkbox and when you make any changes in a slide transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Automatic slides advance You can set the presentation to automatically advance to the next slide after a set amount of time from the Slide Transition section in the Task pane Go to Advance slide and select Automatically after then choose the required amount of time in seconds that each slide will be displayed Click on the Apply to All
334. osition and Customize Ev If a bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the default styles available on the Bullets page If a graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page If a numbered list is needed select one of the default numbering styles on the Numbering type page x Bullets and Numbering Bulle ts Numbering type Graphics Position Customize Selection q s ok Cancel Help Reset Figure 121 Bullets and Numbering dialog For a single line in the list click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it and then follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous instruction set If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not So Some care must be taken Adding pictures tables charts media files and other objects As we have seen in addition to text a contents box can contain also pictures tables charts and movies This section provides a quick overview of how to work with these objects for a more detailed description you are invited to consult the Impress Guide 138 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Adding pictures To add a picture to a contents box e Goto Insert gt Picture on the main menu bar and t
335. otes Handout and Slide Sorter These five tabs are called View buttons The Workspace below the View buttons changes depending on the chosen view The workspace views are described in detail on page 124 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Figure 104 Workspace tabs Toolbars Many toolbars can be used during slide creation they can be displayed or hidden by clicking View gt Toolbars and selecting from the menu You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Status bar The Status bar located at the bottom of the Impress window contains information that you may find useful when working on a presentation For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Impress in the Impress Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the Note ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt General Slide Number Zoom Slider TextEdit Paragraph 2 Row 2 Column 20 Ty 1 538 5 31 tft 6 46 46 aj Slide 1 5 First 4 E 76 Information Area Cursor Position ne Slide Style Unsaved Changes Zoom Perce
336. ou can scroll the upper and lower parts independently Notice in Figure 78 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 95 i You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a cell Tip immediately below and to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window gt Split Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line 4o Split screen bar Figure 81 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the page Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar You can scroll the left and right parts of the window independently Removing split views To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their pla
337. ou can use in Impress are e Date fixed e Date variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Time fixed e Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Author first and last names listed in the OpenOffice org user data e Page number slide number e File name Adding comments to a presentation Impress supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc In Normal View choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the slide with a larger text box beside it Impress automatically adds your name and the current date at the bottom of the text box Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to the comment by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can apply formatting to selected text delete the current comment delete all comments from the same author or delete all comments in the presentation You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the slide Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a diffe
338. packaged ones and also create new ones Presentation styles affect three elements of a slide master background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the sub points of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the sub points of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections Slide masters Impress comes with a collection of slide masters These slide masters are shown in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane Figure 124 This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name ofa subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails Each of the slide masters shown in the Available for Use list is from a template of the same name If you have created your own templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list Tasks View X Master Pages o a il E Used in This Presentation a E Recently Used Available for Use ERE LS ed TH al
339. pe If you cannot find what you want under File gt Save As look under File gt Export as well Apache OpenOffice can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing documents Apache OpenOffice provides several ways to quickly and easily send documents as an e mail attachment in one of three formats OpenDocument Apache OpenOffice s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF Note Documents can only be sent from the Apache OpenOffice menu if you have an e mail program such as Thunderbird installed on your computer 248 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail OpenOffice org opens your default e mail program The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File gt Send gt E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint Apache OpenOffice first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens your e mail program with the file attached
340. penOffice 3 4 Getting Started Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the slide show order Clicking a slide in this pane selects it and places it in the Workspace When a slide is in the Workspace you can make changes any way you like Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides simultaneously in the Slides pane e Add new slides to the presentation e Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the presentation e Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed e Rename a slide e Duplicate a slide copy and paste or move it to a different position in the presentation cut and paste It is also possible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections To expand the section you wish to use click on the title bar of each section Only one section at a time can be expanded Master Pages Here you define the page slide style for your presentation Impress includes several designs of Master Pages slide masters One of them
341. phics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 168 is made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list box placed in PaymentType and a graphic background Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create a Vacations form which will contain a form and a subform In the main database window Figure 163 click the Forms icon in the left column In the Tasks list double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the Form Wizard Figure 169 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations F Available fields Fields in the form Date aie Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper l Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment Figure 169 Form Wizard steps Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 185 Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Table Vacations Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click Subform based upon existing relation 3 Fuel is listed as a relation we want to add So cli
342. plied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible Click OK If you wish you can now go to the Styles and Formatting window to modify specific styles These modifications do not change the theme they only change the appearance of this specific spreadsheet document Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 107 Using conditional formatting You can set up cell formats to change depending on conditions that you specify For example in a table of numbers you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red Conditional formatting depends upon the use of styles and the AutoCalculate feature Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutoCalculate must be enabled See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for details Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you need a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format gt Row gt Hide or right click and choose Hide To hide or show selected cells choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or right click a
343. points and lines object frames individual points on objects or page edges This function is Known as Snap The snap function is easier to work with at the highest practical zoom value You can use two different snap functions at the same time for example Snapping to a guide line and to the page edge It is best however to activate only those functions that you really need This section Summaries the snap to grid function For more detailed information about the snap functions see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Snap to grid Use this function to move an object exactly to a grid point See Figure 137 Switch this function on and off with View gt Grid gt Snap to Grid and on the Options toolbar with the icon Figure 137 Exact positioning with snap to grid Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 153 Showing the grid To make the grid visible choose View gt Grid gt Display Grid Alternatively turn the grid on or off with the icon on the Options toolbar Configuring the grid The color spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis The spacing between the lines is defined in the Grid options dialog Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid Grid Snap to grid Resolution Subdivision Horizontal 0 50cm Horizontal 10 point s Vertical 0 50cm Vertical 10 point s L Synchronize axes Snap Snap
344. port final settings Use the suggested name which is the same as the query Select Static report Click Finish Creating a dynamic report Now we will create a report with some statistics on our fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Fuel Economy We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query Then we will add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query l When opening a query to edit it it might appear as in Figure 220 If you move Tip your cursor over the black line circled it becomes a double headed arrow Drag it to a lower position E Fuel E End Reading z FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity wee eee jeld Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading Alias Quanity Begin End Distance Table Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading sort Visible De Fa De De EJ unction Jriterion gt 0 Figure 220 Appearance of query when opened for editing 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query a Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the pop up menu b Inthe Fuel table list double click to add Fue Cost to the bottom table Figure 221 c Save and close the query 216 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel x x a P lt gt 0 Figure 221 Adding an additional field to the query 2 Add the FuelCost
345. position _ To snap lines L_ When creating or moving objects To the page margins Extend edges L To object frame _ When rotating 15 00 degrees L To object points Point reduction 15 00 degrees Snap range 5 Pixels Figure 138 Setting grid options In the dialog shown in Figure 262 you can set the following parameters e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is Horizontal 1 cm Vertical 2 cm the grid consists of rectangles 2 cm high and 1 cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects snap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid e The pixel size of the snap area defines how close you need to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will snap to it Changing the color of the grid points The default grid dots are light gray which can be hard to see To change the color of the grid points choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance In the Drawing Presentation section you can change the color of the grid points On the Color Settings pulldown menu select a more suitable visible color for example black 154 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Color
346. r Mozilla browser such as Firefox you can enable the Browser Plug in so you can open AOO files in your browser print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used H Options Internet E mail ina b OpenOffice or gt a a Sending documents as e mail attachments b Language Settings gt OpenOffice org Base E mail program thunderbird b Charts v Internet Proxy Search E mail Browser Plug in Figure 304 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux and Mac OS X users Controlling AOO s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in AOO s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do then select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools gt AutoCorrect Options You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown in Figure 305 In other components of AOO the dialog has on
347. r click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending toolbar buttons Using the dialog you can sort the selected cells using up to three columns in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If two entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one witha lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types of cells then use this option Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results If a range is specified that does not have the necessary number of cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Custom sort order Select the box then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt Sort Lists from the drop down list Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Using formulas and functions You may need more than numbers and text on your spreadsheet Often the contents of one cell depend on the contents of other cells Formulas are equations using numbers and variables to get a result The variables are cell l
348. r which styles go with which level in the table of contents See Chapter 3 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Enter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For example you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body paragraph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you can avoid manually applying styles in most cases 48 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer Word Processing with Apache OpenOffice What is Writer Writer is the word processor component of Apache OpenOffice In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features Templates and styles see Chapter 2 Page layout methods including frames columns and tables Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects Built in drawing tools Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document Change tracking during revisions Database integration including a bibliography database Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 9
349. ragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats e Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns e Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists e Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number and cell protection e Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes e Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of Apache OpenOffice as listed in Table 1 Apache OpenOffice comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify them or create new styles as described in this chapter Table 1 Styles available in Apache OpenOffice components Style Type Writer Calc Draw Impress Page X X Paragraph Character Frame lt x xX X X Numbering Cell X Presentation X X Graphics included in X X Frame styles Applying styles Apache OpenOffice provides several ways for you to apply styles Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 Click the Styles and Formatting icon located at the left hand end of the object bar or click Format gt Styles and Formatting
350. rd 185 entering data 203 modifying 188 subform 186 tab order 198 database reports creating 213 modifying 218 static 213 database table create using wizard 176 dynamic 216 joined fields 187 relationships 183 DataPilot Tools 301 date conversion automatic 98 default file format 284 default template 44 derivative markup Math 230 Design View Base creating anew table 179 creating forms 198 creating queries 208 dictionaries installing 287 dictionary 60 different first page 47 digital rights management DRM 246 digital signature 252 distorting an image 167 divide document into chapters 47 dockable window 20 document closing 25 create from template 39 creating 23 Opening 23 starting new 23 document status option 271 document views 52 download updates automatically 282 downloading OpenOffice org 16 drag and drop 253 Draw 171 features 149 status bar 151 toolbars 151 drawing circle or ellipse 157 duplication 168 Flash export 171 HTML export 171 inserting pictures 170 line 156 rectangle 157 save in a foreign format 171 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 262 drawing objects 3D objects 170 grouping 263 grouping and combining 169 positioning 170 310 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started properties 262 Drawing toolbar 152 262 drawing tools 261 duplication 168 dynamic gradients 167 E E mail options 289 e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 249 several recipients 249 Writer document as attachment 248
351. re 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Math 231 The fn is replaced by a numbered formula E mc 1 Now you can double click on the formula to edit it For example here is the Riemann Zeta function z tb 2 n 1 N You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 1 with these steps 1 Choose Insert gt Cross reference from the menu bar 2 On the Cross references tab Figure 243 under Type select Text 3 Under Selection select the equation number 4 Under Format select Reference 5 Click Insert Done If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update Tip To insert the equation number without parenthesis around it choose Numbering instead of Reference under Format Fields Document Cross references Functions DocInformation Variables Database Type Selection Sek Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Text Figure Bookmarks Insert reference to Above below 45 Page Style Category and Number Caption Text Numbering Figure 243 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number 232 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing doc
352. re 222 We will be working on that report These same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing Dis Fuel Fuel Cos tance Econ Cast pe omy miii ile Figure 222 A report in edit mode The Author is the name you listed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data The date is not correct The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 4 26 20 so that the cursor is next to the field Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert gt Fields gt Date This places today s date where the original date was 3 Change the date formatting a Double click the date field you just inserted The Edit Fields Document window opens Edit Fields Document Type select Format Date 12 31 1999 Dec 31 99 Dec 31 1999 31 Dec 1999 Figure 223 Modifying a date field b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December 31 1999 choice Click OK Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it to where you want it This has to be done for each column in eac
353. ree terms for a slide that is used to create other Note slides master slide slide master and master page This book uses the term Slide master except when describing the user interface A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text Styles All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing a style in a slide master results in changes to all the slides based on that slide master but you can modify individual slides without affecting the slide master Although it is highly recommended to use the slide masters whenever possible Note there are occasions where manual changes are needed for a particular slide for example to enlarge the chart area when the text and chart layout is used Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 141 Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The prepackaged presentation styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be created In the case of graphic styles you can modify the pre
354. relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 283 Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version AOO by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 Extended While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 Extended is opened in an earlier version of OpenOffice org using ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents with people who are still using older versions of OpenOffice org save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 Size optimization for ODF format OpenOffice org documents are XML files When you select this option AOO writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Office you might want to change the Always save as attribute for documents to one of the Microsoft Office formats Although AOO can open files in the docx xlsx and pptx formats produced by Note Microsoft Office 2007 it cannot save in those formats This capability is planned for a future release VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Propert
355. rent background color for their comments 146 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started o This a sample of comment that youcan poan dd title k B Bold i f Italic U Underline i a Strikethrough Eat is G3 Paste Delete Comment Delete All Comments by Peter Schofield Delete All Comments Figure 129 A comment Setting up the slide show As mentioned in Modifying the slide show on page 134 Impress allocates reasonable default settings for slide shows while at the same time allowing for customizing many aspects of the slide show experience This section covers only some aspects advanced techniques are explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the mpress Guide Most of the tasks are best done in Slide Sorter view where you can see most of the slides simultaneously Choose View gt Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the workspace One slide set multiple presentations In many situations you may find that you have more slides than the time available to present them or you may want to provide a rapid overview without dwelling on the details Rather than having to create a new presentation you can use two tools that Impress offers hiding slides and custom slide shows To hide a slide right click on the slide thumbnail either in the Slide pane or in the Workspace area If you are using the Slide S
356. rent page sheet or slide number and the total number of pages sheets or slides in the document Double click on this field to open the Navigator Other uses of this field depend on the component Page style or slide design Shows the current page style or slide design To edit the current page style or slide design double click on this field Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Object information Displays information relevant to the cursor s position or the selected element of the document Double clicking in this area usually opens a relevant dialog Zoom slider and percent To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Double clicking on the zoom level percent opens the Zoom amp View Layout dialog 22 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Starting a new document You can start a new blank document in Apache OpenOffice in several ways When Apache OpenOffice is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running the Start Center is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templat
357. rint dialog select the range of pages to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence numbers of the pages to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of text 1 Inthe document select the material text and graphics to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 236 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 3 The Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog now includes a Selection option and the preview box shows the selected material See Figure 248 4 Click the Print button selecting pages sheets slides to print addition to printing a full document you can choose to print individual pages sheets lides anges of pages shects slides or a Selection of a document The details vary slightly in Writer alc Draw and Impress as described in this section T Tj Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog Select the page to print T aj In the Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option T b Enter the sequence number of the page you want to print The preview box changes to show the selected page F you have restarted page numbering within the document the sequence number is not the same as the page number T 3 Click the Print button T Printing a range of pages T Chocee File Print from the menu bar T 2 On the Print dialog select the range of p
358. rmats Others Cedar b a times b N a b a over b a div b a b a cire b a wideslash b a widebslash b nega aandb aorb Figure 232 Right click context menu Markup You can type the markup directly in the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5x4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula Tip The formula markup resembles the way the formula reads in English 224 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup Display Command Display Command a b a b Ja sqrt a q a 2 a an J f x dy int f x dx a suman a lt b a lt b o0 infinity axb a times b Xy x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters B y 0 and so on are common in mathematical formulas These characters are not available in the Elements window or on the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek characters is simple Type a sign followed the name of the character in English In localized versions of OpenOffice org these names are localized e To write a lowercase character type the name of the character in lowercase e To write an uppercase character type the name of the character in uppercase A complete table of Greek characters is provided in the Math Guide See the table below for some examples Lowercase Uppercase alpha gt qg ALPHA gt 4
359. rol key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Note Macintosh users substitute the Command key when instructions in this chapter say to use the Control key 54 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Around the World in 80 Days Jules Verne es aai ii ans held up his hands and seemed about to collapse so overcome was he with stupefied astonishment In eighty days responded M But the trunks gasp ed Pa diaaa unre s aoe his head from to left Figure 41 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text Press Esc to exit from this mode Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using
360. rom the project s website www openoffice org To install Apache OpenOffice follow the same procedure that you use to install other software Extensions and add ons Extensions and add ons to enhance Apache OpenOffice are collected in the official extensions repository http extensions services openoffice org Most are free but some are not See Chapter 11 Setting up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice for more information 16 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Starting Apache OpenOffice The most common ways to start Apache OpenOffice are e Using the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu On GNOME it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo When Apache OpenOffice was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu If you see only one icon it opens the Start Center Figure 11 from which the components can be started The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface e From an icon on the desktop or on a Mac the Launchpad Starting from an existing document You can start Apache OpenOffice by double clicking on the filename of a document with an OpenDocument extension such as odt ods odp in a file manager such as Windows Explorer Finder on
361. roperty of the field Figure 175 Form Controls toolbar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 189 e Scroll down to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting Click it to open the list Select the Standard long entry Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No It is also a dropdown list Click to open the list Select Yes l To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode On Off icon the Tip second icon from the left in Figure 175 You can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten the width of some fields All of the fields with a label containing the word payment are too wide They need shortening before the controls are moved 1 Control click the BPayment field Figure 176 Selecting a field 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a double headed arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch Tip If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 177 Figure 177 Positioning of con
362. rowser Figure 255 Links page of PDF Options dialog Export bookmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Security page of PDF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it 246 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissions can be restricted See Figure 256 After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with t
363. rrency percentage date exponential standard add decimal place delete decimal place For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 94 of the Format Cells dialog e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker 104 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Q Language All pa English UK User defined 2 Number Percent 4 K IH 7 i z 4 Leading zeroes 1 Format code 0 00 RED 0 00 User defined Figure 94 Format Cells gt Numbers Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Name box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools Tip gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice To choose the size of the font click the arrow next to the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar For oth
364. s Fant Sze Spacing Alignment Text Mode Figure 239 Changing the font size for a formula 2 Select a larger font size under Base size top most entry gj Font Sizes Ea Base size 16pt OK Relative sizes Cancel Text 100 Default Indexes 60 oo e eo B oo e poo S eo Functions 100 Operators 100 Limits 5O Figure 240 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 241 Betore m 3 14159 Eai sE A ter T 3 Figure 241 Result of changing the base font size 228 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Formula layout The most difficult part of using Math comes when writing complicated formulas This section provides some advice Brackets are your friends Math knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following example Markup Result 2 2 over x 1 X 2 2 over x 1 x 1 Equations over more than one line x 3 vod Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key though the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below Suppose you want to type an equation covering more than one line For example Markup Result X 3 y x
365. s Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the selected menu item to a different position 6 When you have finished making all your changes click OK not shown in illustration to save them Creating a new menu In the Customize dialog click New to display the dialog shown in Figure 307 1 Type aname for your new menu in the Menu name box 2 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar 3 Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating anew menu you need to add some commands to it as described in Adding a command to a menu on page 293 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 291 New Menu Menu name New Menu 1 Cancel Menu position Help Figure 307 Adding a new menu Modifying existing menus To modify an existing menu select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not available for the menus supplied by AOO To move a menu such as File choose Menu gt Move A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 307 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu in
366. s the default name Graphics6 or you need to use the Hyperlink dialog to modify the visible text In contrast cross references to figures with captions automatically show useful text and you have a choice of several variations of the name e If you save a Writer document to HTML hyperlinks remain active but cross references do not Both remain active when the document is exported to PDF Using hyperlinks The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the document containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View gt Navigator or pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink 4 Inthe list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 Inthe Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink You can also use the Hyperlink dialog to insert and modify hyperlinks within and between documents Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 75 Navigator v Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Headings Copyright What is Writer The Writer interface Changing document views Amman 4 0104G53 GettingSt
367. s you have to use the over command Combine this with either the letter d for a total derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Note Notice that we have to use braces squiggly brackets to make the derivative 230 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Markup Result df over dx df dx partial f over partial y Of Oy a f partial42 f over partial t 2 Ap How do I align my equations at the equals sign Math does not have a command for aligning equations on a particular character but you can use a matrix to do this as shown below Markup Result matrix alignr x y alignl 2 Ly 9 alignrx alignl 2 y x 2 y The empty braces around are necessary because Is a binary operator and thus needs an expression on each side You can reduce the spacing around if you change the inter column spacing of the matrix 1 With the equation editor open choose Format gt Spacing from the menu bar 2 Inthe Spacing dialog Figure 242 click the Category button and select Matrices in the drop down menu 3 Enter 0 for Column spacing and click OK lt q Spacing Matrix Line spacing Cancel Column spacing Category Y Default Figure 242 Changing spacing in a matrix formula Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of Math s best hidden features The steps are simple but obscu
368. s book 14 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice What is Apache OpenOffice Apache OpenOffice OpenOffice org is a freely available full featured office productivity suite Its native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents Apache OpenOffice can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office Apache OpenOffice 3 4 installs as OpenOffice org 3 4 Therefore icons Note window title bars options in dialogs and other places show the name OpenOffice org Apache OpenOffice includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several versions of Microsoft Word files Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected from a high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analysis Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integra
369. s contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options e Window contains commands for the display window e Help contains links to the OpenOffice org Help file What s This and information about the program Toolbars Apache OpenOffice has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked The top docked toolbar is called the Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is consistent across the OpenOffice org applications The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting toolbar It is a context sensitive bar that shows the relevant tools in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the icon Figure 3 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen
370. s to it This allows multiple separate areas of the same sheet to be printed while not printing the whole sheet After you have defined a print range 1 Highlight the range of cells to be added to the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Add This adds the extra cells to the print range The page break lines no longer display on the screen Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 111 Note The additional print range will print as a separate page even if both ranges are on the same sheet Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen Editing a print range At any time you can directly edit the print range for example to remove or resize part of the print range Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Choose Format gt Page from the main menu 2 Select the Sheet tab 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Style Default Fq Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Left to right then down First page number 1 Print L Column and row headers Charts L Grid Drawing objects L
371. save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payments types 212 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started To fully use queries requires a knowledge of set operations unions Note intersections and or complements and any combinations of these Having a copy of the Hsg db User Guide available from http hsqidb org is also extremely useful Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was created Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data For example a report on expenses for a vacation in the past should probably be a static report because it is based upon specific data that does not change However a report on the fuel data should probably be a dynamic report because this report depends upon data that does change Dynamic reports update only the data that is changed or added to a table or query Caution They do not show any modifications made to the table or query itself For example after creating
372. scheme Scheme LibreOffice awe Delete Custom colors On User interface elements Notes background Drawing Presentation Grid Identifier Comment Number String Figure 139 Changing the grid color Positioning objects with guiding lines To simplify the positioning of objects it is possible to make visible guiding lines extensions of the edges of the object while it is being moved These guiding lines have no snap function The guiding lines can be activated or deactivated under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View gt Guides when moving or by clicking on the icon on the Options toolbar The basic drawing shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing Toolbar This section describes only a few of the basic shapes These shapes include rectangles and squares circles ellipses and arcs 3D objects curves lines and arrows text and connectors All shapes in Draw are called objects See the Draw Guide for a complete description of the shapes available When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the nfo field at the left side Note in the status bar changes to reflect the present action Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on Figure 140 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons needed in the following sections The Text icon is also included 7 gt mE T hrer Figure 140 Part of the Drawing tool
373. see in the text The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice includes instructions on starting new documents Opening existing documents saving documents and password protecting documents Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file If you need to exchange files with users of Microsoft Word who are unwilling or unable to receive odt files you can save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 Important First save your document in the file format used by Writer odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then choose File gt Save As On the Save As dialog in the File type or Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need Click Save Caution Some formatting may be lost when you save in formats other than OpenDocument Formats You may wish to test some typical files to see if yours save correctly in other formats Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 53 Save as x D Document Files Microsoft Office Title Type Size 7 Auto Save Folder CJ Family Folder C Graphic Images Folder Cg Miscellaneo
374. serted 3 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings you need to update the table of contents To do this 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Right click and choose Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools gt Options gt Note OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere in it and choose Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 71 In addition to alphabetical indexes other types of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the
375. sheet Mo of sheets Mame 6 From file Figure 74 Insert Sheet dialog Moving and copying sheets You can move or copy sheets within the same spreadsheet by using either the mouse drag and drop or a dialog Drag and drop does not work if you wish to move or copy a sheet to a different spreadsheet instead you need to use the dialog Using the mouse To move a sheet to a different position within the same spreadsheet click on the sheet tab and drag it left or right Two little triangles indicate where the sheet will be dropped see Figure 75 The Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 91 mouse pointer not shown in the illustration may change to include an indicator the indicator symbol varies with your operating system 32 33 34 j t Sheetl sree aen qF Sheet 1 3 Default Figure 75 Dragging a sheet to move it To copy a sheet within the same spreadsheet hold down the Control key Option key on Mac while you click on the sheet tab and drag it The mouse pointer may change to include a plus sign or other indicator the symbol varies with your operating system Using a dialog The Move Copy dialog provides the opportunity to specify exactly where you want the sheet to go in the same or a different document at the same time as moving or copying occurs Note When moving or copying sheets between different spreadsheets be sure that both documents are open Follow these steps 1 In the current document ri
376. sional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects e Drawing and page style integration e B zier curves This chapter introduces some of Draw s features but it does not attempt to cover all of them See the Draw Guide and the application Help for more information Parts of the main Draw window The components of the main Draw window are shown in Figure 130 You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task in hand and user preferences Therefore your setup may look different For example many users put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace not at the bottom as shown here Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 149 You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure 130 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Page Pane a BUs 7 BEY a TYEE oe to i 0 00cm Mech Color C Blue 9 E Pages x It 10 amp 5 4 2 2 4 6 8 1D 12 14 18 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 3 Il Standard toolbar 6 amp Line and filling toolbar Slide pane Work area Drawing toolbar Status bar 1 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 a Lee ayout Controls Dimension Lines Rl BeT 3 lFe
377. so be available the next time you load the Note presentation If you want to delete the unused slide masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Slide Design dialog If the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway Tip To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to minimize the number of slide masters used Load Slide Design z o T 44 Figure 127 Load Slide Design dialog for selecting templates Modifying a slide master The following items can be changed on a slide master Background color gradient hatching or bitmap Background objects for example add a logo or decorative graphics Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting dialog is open To select the slide master for modification 1 2 3 4 5 Select View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the slide masters Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 of the Impress Guide Save the file before c
378. sor arrows to select the rest of the range The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 69 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the l Name Box as described in Using a cell reference on page 84 To select a Tip range of cells enter the cell reference for the upper left hand cell followed by a colon and then the lower right hand cell reference For example to select the range that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move the mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in Apache OpenOffice Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter See Figure 60 To select a single row click on the row identifier number 88 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key 3 Clic
379. ssions 56 relationships database 183 remove personal information on saving 279 removing personal data 252 replacement table font 278 Report Wizard database 214 revision marks 74 RGB 152 right click context menus 21 rotating an object 163 rows in Calc deleting 90 freezing 93 inserting 90 selecting 88 rulers Draw 150 S save AutoRecovery information 283 save original Basic code 284 save relative URLs 283 saving files 24 scaling factor user interface 273 scanner 256 screen font antialiasing 273 security 24 security options 278 selecting nonconsecutive items 54 vertical block of text 55 selecting objects 161 selection clipboard 274 selection lists Calc 101 selection in Calc cells 88 columns 88 rows 88 sheets 89 send backward 162 send document as e mail 249 sequence of styles automatic 48 setup options 269 shadows 166 shapes Draw 160 shared extension 300 sheet tabs Calc 81 sheets in Calc deleting 93 inserting 91 314 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started renaming 93 selecting 89 size optimization 284 slanting an object 164 Slide Design dialog 143 slide master 133 141 apply 143 author information 145 creat 142 slide show automatically advance 148 See presentation 119 transitions 147 slides layouts 131 master 133 141 modifying 133 Snap functions 153 Snap to grid 153 sort order database fields 206 sorting records Calc 109 special characters 58 61 spelling c
380. st update Fields are the basis of cross referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Linking to another part of a document If you type in cross references to other parts of a document those references can easily get out of date if you reorganize the order of topics add or remove material or reword a heading Writer provides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date by inserting links to other parts of the same document or to a different document e Hyperlinks e Cross references The two methods have the same result if you Control click the link when the document is open in Writer you are taken directly to the cross referenced item However they also have major differences e The text in a hyperlink does not automatically update if you change the text of the linked item although you can change it manually but changed text does automatically update in a cross reference e When using a hyperlink you do not have a choice of the content of the link for example text or page number but when using a cross reference you have several choices including bookmarks e To hyperlink to an object such as a graphic and have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to either give such an object a useful name instead of leaving it a
381. strictly speaking a control 2 Radio buttons only one can be selected at a time 3 Checkbox more than one can be selected at a time 4 Spin box click the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the text box next to it or type in the text box 5 Thumbnail or preview 6 Drop down list from which to select an item 7 Push buttons Preface 13 Acknowledgements This book is adapted from Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 with additional material adapted from Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 4 The contributors to those books are OpenOffice org Jean Hollis Weber Thomas Astleitner Chris Bonde JiHui Choi Laurent Duperval Peter Hillier Brook Rachel Kartch Michael Kotsarinis Dan Lewis Andrew Pitonyak Hazel Russman Joe Sellman Alex Thurgood Linda Worthington LibreOffice Ron Faile Jr Martin Fox John A Smith Dan Lewis Michele Zarri Richard Barnes Nicole Cairns Richard Detwiler Spencer E Harpe Richard Holt Stefan A Keel Peter Kupfer Alan Madden Carol Roberts Gary Schnabl Janet Swisher Barbara M Tobias Jeremy Cartwright Andrew Pitonyak David Michel Magnus Adielsson Agnes Belzunce Daniel Carrera Alexander No l Dunne Regina Henschel John Kane Jared Kobos lan Laurenson Michel Pinquier lain Roberts Robert Scott Jim Taylor Claire Wood Jean Hollis Weber Hazel Russman Peter Schofield Kevin A McKenna contributed further editing and review of an earlier draft of thi
382. t The dialog shown in Figure 311 opens 3 Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK Contents Pages Comments Pictures and objects Left pages None Form controls W Right pages Comments only if Page background Brochure End of document Print text in black End of page Hidden text Text placeholder Other Print automatically inserted blank pages Paper tray from printer settings Figure 311 Setting up AOO for sending faxes 4 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 309 Click Add 5 On the Add Commands dialog Figure 312 select Documents in the Category list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list 6 In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax 296 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Category Application Templates View Edit Options BASIC Insert Format Navigate Controls Table Commands Outline to Clipboard Outline to Presentation d Print d Print File Directly BE Printer Settings ae Properties Recheck Document a Reload I Save E Save As i eSend Default F _ Drawing_ Versions rrr iL
383. t and end values and the increment For example if you entered start and end values of 1 and 7 with an increment of 2 you would get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 In all these cases the Fill tool creates only a momentary connection between the cells Once they are filled the cells have no further connection with one another Fill Series x Direction Series type Down Linear C Growth C Up _ Date AutoFill Start value January Figure 84 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 85 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 99 A 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December ERE Figure 85 Result of fill series selection shown in Figure 84 Defining a fill series To define your own fill Series 1 Go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt Sort Lists This dialog shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S Tue January February March
384. t and then add the desired transition For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition e Hide Slide hidden slides are not shown in the slide show e Cut removes the selected slide and saves it to the clipboard e Copy copies the selected slide to the clipboard without removing it e Paste inserts a slide from the clipboard This option will also allow you to specify whether you want to paste the copied slide Before or After the selected slide Chapter 5 Getting Started with Impress 127 Creating a new presentation This section describes how to start a new presentation using the Presentation Wizard The first thing to do is decide on the purpose of the presentation and plan the presentation Although you can make changes as you go having an idea of who the audience will be the structure the content and how the presentation will be delivered will save you a lot of time from the start Tip When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears x Presentation Wizard Type Empty presentation From template Open existing presentation Preview O Do not show this wizard again uie nei C ee Figure 114 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Under Type choose one of the options These options are covered in the Impress Guide e Empty presentation creates a blank presentation e From template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new present
385. t data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3 D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click Modify the form 3 Click Finish The form opens in Edit mode Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture We will also modify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list Dox First we must decide what we want to change The discussion will follow this ten step outline of our planned changes 1 Provide a dropdown capability for the Date field in the main form and lengthen the field to show the day of the week month day and year 2 Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word Payment 3 Move the controls into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous 4 Change the wording of some of the labels Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous 5 Change the lengths of several fields and labels Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable
386. t to the clipboard Flip the object then click on an empty area of the Draw screen in order to deselect the object Paste from the clipboard to put a copy of the object in its original location and now you have a mirror copy lt gt O O Distorting an image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect See Chapter 4 in the Draw Guide for details Dynamic gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same See Chapter 4 in the Draw Guide for details Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 167 Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates The result of a duplication is a new group of objects To start duplication click on an object or group and choose Edit gt Duplicate The dialog shown in Figure 152 appears When the options chosen in that dialog are applied to a blue rectangle they produce the result shown
387. tarted Chapter F Getting Started with Base Databases in Apache OpenOffice Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by Apache OpenOffice For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail merge letter A shop stock list could be a data source managed through AOO Apache OpenOffice uses the terms Data Source and Database to refer to the Note same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase or a spreadsheet or text document holding data This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by AOO It also covers using the Base component of AOO to register other data sources A data source can be a database spreadsheet or text document Note Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files created by this engine are kept in one zipped file The database forms are included in this zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table from the e
388. tarted with Calc 89 Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted individually or in groups When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the eft of the highlighted Note column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row Cells in the new columns or rows are formatted like the corresponding cells in the column or row before or to the left of which the new column or row is inserted Single column or row Using the Insert menu 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Choose either Insert gt Columns or Insert gt Rows Using the mouse 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Right click the header of the column or row 3 Choose Insert Rows or Insert Columns Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the column or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3
389. tch to the target document 5 Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted 6 Press Control V to insert the image Caution If the application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the graphic is A pasted into the target the image stored on the clipboard could be lost Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 255 Inserting an image using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer AOO can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the AOO document as an image To start this procedure place the cursor where you want the graphic to be inserted and chooe Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into AOO Inserting an image from the Gallery The Gallery provides a convenient way to group reusable objects such as graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in all components of AOO See Managing the Gallery on page 257 You can copy or link an object from the Gallery into a document To insert an object i 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon j on the Standard toolbar in Writer and Calc or the Drawing toolbar in Impress and Draw 2 Select a theme 3 S
390. ted into other Apache OpenOffice documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel workbooks and save them in Excel format Calc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of Apache OpenOffice s Draw and Math components Slide shows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsoft s PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats including Macromedia Flash SWF Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice 15 Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of Apache OpenOffice s other components and you can create your own clip art and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphics from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a connected database is much the same
391. ter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information Inserting AutoText To insert AutoText type the shortcut and press F3 Formatting text Using styles is recommended Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort A style is a named set of formatting options Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 2 Using Styles and Templates in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide Formatting paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 48 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the icons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View 62 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Formatting x ae Default z El ag is t amp PITT TTT TIE d 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 1 Open Styles and 5 Align Right 10 ie On Off Formatting Window 6 Justified 11 Bullets On Off 2 Apply Style 7 Line Spacing 1 12 Decrease Indent 3 Align Left 8 Line Spacing 1 5 13 Increase Indent 4 Centered 9 Line Spacing 2 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 48 Formatting toolbar showing
392. ter them in the table at the bottom of the query d Inthe Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 5 25 2007 AND 5 26 2007 Date I FuelCost Fuel Fuel x x Criterion BETWEEN 05 25 2007 AND 05 26 2007 Figure 219 Setting the criterion for a query 2 Save name and close the query Suggestion Vacation Fuel Purchases When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DD YYYY or DD MM YYYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default setting is MM DD YYYY Each date must have a before and after it Hence May 25 2007 is written 05 25 2007 or 25 5 2007 depending upon your language s default setting for dates Tip 3 Open anew report Right click the Vacation Fuel Purchases query e Select Report Wizard from the pop up menu Note When a new report is opened in this way the query used to open it is automatically selected in the Tables or queries dropdown list in the Report Wizard Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 215 4 Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Click Next 5 Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next 6 Group fields Click Date to highlight it Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 7 Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 8 Create re
393. tes 35 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection Creating a new style using the Style dialog To create a new style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an existing style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by changing the font from Times to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creating a new style from a selection You can create a new style by copying an existing manual format This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 Inthe document select the item you want to save as a style 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon 4 Inthe Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list shows the names of e
394. text anda separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Adding images and other graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types e Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using Apache OpenOffice s drawing tools e Charts created using Apache OpenOffice s Chart facility See Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book and Chapter 8 Working with Graphics in the Writer Guide Adding tables spreadsheets and charts Tables are a useful way to organize and present large amounts of information They can often be used as an alternative to spreadsheets Tables can also be used as a page layout tool to position text in areas of a document as described in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages of the Writer Guide To insert a new table position the cursor where you want the table to appear then use any of the following methods to open the Insert Table dialog where you can specify the properties for the new table e From the main menu choose Insert gt Table e From the main menu choose Table gt Insert gt Table e Press Ctrl F12 on the keyboard e From the Standard toolbar click the Table icon E You can also click the small arrow to the right of the Table icon and select the number of cells to directly insert a table with the default table properti
395. the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Move the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Move the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modify the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Move the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon Move the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Choose between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the object Ungroup icon Ungroup the se
396. the following methods Drag and drop 1 Open a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert 2 Drag the image into the AOO document and drop it where you want it to appear A faint vertical line marks where the image will be dropped This method embeds saves a copy of the image file in the Writer document To link the file instead of embedding it hold down the Contro Shift keys while dragging the image Insert Picture dialog 1 Click in the AOO document where you want the image to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Picture gt From File from the menu bar 3 On the Insert Picture dialog Figure 263 notice the two options at the bottom left Preview and Link Choose Preview to view a thumbnail of the selected image on the right so you can verify that you have the correct file See page 254 for the use of Link 4 Navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open Chapter 10 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 253 If you choose the Link option a message box appears when you click Open The message states that the picture will not be stored with the document but only referenced as a link and asks if you want to embed the graphic instead Choose Keep Link if you want the link or Embed Graphic if you do not To prevent this message from appearing again deselect the box by Ask when linking a graphic at the bottom of the message Note Insert picture Users jean Pictures SouthAustralia2011 FlindersRa
397. ther of these options the next time you open this dialog you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown in Figure 295 These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout are not discussed here Options Language Settings t OpenOffice org gt b Load Save v Language Settings Languages Writing Aids Searching in Japanese This is where you make settings Asian Layout with OpenOffice org Complex Text Layout Figure 301 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected Language Settings Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice 287 Language of User interface Default English USA Locale setting Default English Australia Decimal separator key same as locale setting Default languages for documents Default currency Default AUD 7 Western P English Australia Asian Default Chinese simplified CIL Default Hindi For the current document only Enhanced language support Show UI elements for East Asian writings Show UI elements for Bi Directional writing Figure 302 Choosing language options Choose spelling options To choose the options for checking spelling click Language Settings gt Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 303 choose the settings that are useful for you Writing aids Available language modules OpenOffice org New Thesaurus
398. ti Aliasing iy Galaxy default gt Mouse W Use system font for user interface Mouse positioning No automatic positioning enu Middle mouse button Icons in menus Automatic scrolling electio Font Lists ieg Show prewiew of fonts 4 F W Transparency 75 W Show font history Figure 282 Choosing View options for AOO applications User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the AOO user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by AOO for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font anti aliasing Not available in Windows not shown in Figure 282 Select this option t
399. tions 17 Quickstarter 17 system requirements 16 middle mouse button function 274 mirror copies 167 mouse positioning 274 MySQL 173 N navigation cell to cell in Calc 85 sheet to sheet in Calc 87 Navigation icons 53 Navigation toolbar 28 52 Navigator 27 123 Calc 85 new document 23 non breaking hyphen 58 non breaking spaces 58 nonconsecutive items selecting 54 numbered list 136 numbering equations 231 numbering pages 68 O OASIS 11 objects adjusting size 163 moving 163 rotating 163 selecting several 162 ODF format version saving 284 Office Assistant Microsoft 271 online update options 282 Open and Save As dialogs 26 Open Source Initiative OSI 304 Open Save dialogs 271 OpenDocument Format 11 284 Opening a document 23 Options Bar Draw 152 orientation of page 47 outline group controls Calc 108 outline level 137 OXT extension 43 P page break Calc 114 page layout different first page 47 landscape page 47 orientation 47 page layouts 66 page margins 69 150 page numbering 68 parts of the main window 18 password protection 24 password protect PDF 246 paste text 56 path options 275 PDF blank page export 244 digital rights management DRM 246 embed standard fonts 244 encrypt 246 EPS image 243 export documents to 242 form 244 image compression and resolution 243 initial view selection 244 pages to export 242 password protect 246 security settings 246 tagged 244 user interface s
400. to change the ruler to that unit The selected setting applies only to that ruler millimetre jcentimetre a inch sA point te l pica Char Figure 47 Changing the measurement unit for a ruler Chapter 3 Getting Started with Writer 59 Checking spelling and grammar Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways ABc AutoSpellicheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears nul To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text selection click the Spelling and Grammar button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below e You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish French or German on the Spelling and Grammar dialog e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spelling and Grammar dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e Click the Options button on the Spelling and Grammar dialog to open a dialog similar to the one in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids described in Chapter 11
401. to the required position To move submenus such as File Send select the main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence In addition to renaming you can specify a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt an underlined letter in a menu command 1 Select a menu entry 2 Click the Modify button and select Rename 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Save All command by pressing Alt V after opening the File menu using Alt F enter Sa ve All Caution Be careful when using these shortcuts In the example above if the File menu Is not already open then pressing A t V opens the View menu if some other menu is open Alt V might activate some other command 292 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Adding a command to a menu You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog Figure 308 select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use
402. tra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error Adding text to a slide To add text to a slide that contains a text frame click on Click to add text in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its position within the text by using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar see Outline view on page 124 For more information on text see Adding and formatting text on page 134 Adding pictures or objects to a slide To add any pictures or objects to a slide for example a picture clipart drawing photograph or spreadsheet click on Insert then select from the drop down menu what type of insert you require For more information see Adding pictures tables charts media files and other objects on page 138 Modifying the appearance of all slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in the presentation you need to modify the master page or choose a different master page as explained in Working with master pages and styles on page 141 A Slide Master is a slide with a specified set of characteristics that acts as a template and is used as the starting point for creating other slides These characteristics include the background objects in the background formatting of any text used and any background graphics Apache OpenOffice uses three i
403. trols 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 190 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It change shape to a drag icon 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it Caution Do not use Contro click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label but not both To move both use a mouse click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong Step 4 Change the label wording Field names need to be single words However the labels for the fields in a form can be more than one word So we will change them by editing the text in the label The table wizard in Base contains suggested fields which are single words often Note consisting of two separate words Table names in the wizard have been that way also However you can use multiple words as the name of a field label or table We will do so when we create a list box for each of the payment type controls 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following Right click the SnackNo label and select Control from the pop up menu e Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 175 2 The dialog that opens is labeled Properties Label Field It contains all of the properties of the selected label In the Label selection edit the label to
404. u need to first install the extension as described in the previous section All tools listed here are open source and free of charge PDF Import Enables you to make minor modifications to the text of existing PDF files when the original source files do not exist or you are unable to open the source files Whenever possible modify the source and regenerate the PDF to obtain the best results When the extension is installed PDF is listed as a choice in the File Type drop down list in the File gt Open dialog Best results can be achieved with the PDF ODF hybrid file format which this extension also enables A hybrid PDF ODF file is a PDF file that contains an embedded ODF source file Hybrid PDF ODF files will be opened in AOO as an ODF file without any layout changes Non hybrid PDF documents open in Draw Depending on the complexity of the layout changes may be easy or difficult to make and the saved result may or may not preserve the original layout Font substitution may occur Documents with more sophisticated layouts such as those created with professional desktop publishing applications that use special fonts and complex vector graphics are not suitable for the PDF Import Extension Similarly longer documents gt 20 pages may cause some performance and stability problems 300 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Professional Template Pack Il Provides more than 120 templates for Writer Calc and Impress Avail
405. ubtotals for up to three columns Scenarios Tools gt Scenarios opens a dialog for testing what if questions such as different interest rates on a loan Goal seek Use Tools gt Goal Seek if you know the result you want but need to discover what values will produce this result Solver Tools gt Solver is similar to Goal Seek but you can use more than one variable The Solver is designed to minimize or maximize the result according to a set of rules that you define All of these options are further discussed in Chapter 9 in the Calc Guide Printing Printing from Calc is much the same as printing from other Apache OpenOffice components see Chapter 9 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 6 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Define The page break lines display on the screen Tip You can check the print range by using File gt Page Preview Calc will only display the cells in the print range Adding to the print range After defining a print range you can add more cell
406. uery Design toolbar Figure 205 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table the query results are in the right table FuellD Date FuelCost FueQuantity Odometer FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity 0 Friday M 16 00 14 690 704 2 1 Pfs 6 430 1 Friday M 7 00 6 430 78 7 2 1032 3 19 570 2 Saturday 20 00 19 570 1032 3 3 1239 4 15 150 3 Saturday 16 00 15 150 1239 4 4 4 sunday lt AutoFie lt AutoFie Figure 205 Fuel table and query of the fuel table Step 5 Save and close the query Since this query contains the ending odometer reading for our calculations name it End Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Figure 206 But do not close the Add Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click Queries to get the list of queries in the database Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 209 Add Table or Query Tables Queries Figure 206 Selecting queries to add to another query b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close Query _CD Collection Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we w
407. uld now look like Figure 226 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 219 Tit Aathor Date Date Date Date Dan Lewis 4 2 02 Friday May 25 2007 sunday May 27 2007 Motel Tolls Misc 2 00 nt Innck Supper Snachkto st Figure 226 Final report 220 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Chapter O Getting Started with Math Apache OpenOffice s Equation Editor What is Math Math is Apache OpenOffice s component for writing mathematical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as in equation 1 If you Note want to evaluate a numeric value see the Calc Guide df x _ 1 2 SG In x tan x Getting started To insert an equation choose Insert gt Object gt Formula The equation editor opens at the bottom of the screen and the floating Elements window may appear You will also see a small box with a gray border in your document where the formula will be displayed See Figure 227 Entering a formula The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta B This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever a
408. uments from Apache OpenOffice Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the Note document to the printer defined for the document instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use the Print dialog File gt Print or Ctrl P See Figure 244 The Print dialog has four tabs from which you can choose a range of options as described in the following sections The options selected on the Print dialog apply to this printing of this document only Note To specify default printing settings for Apache OpenOffice go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Print and Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print See Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice for more details The different components of Apache OpenOffice have different available print settings as summarized in Table 2 Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 233 80 Print 210mm A4 General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Printer Apache OpenOffice Canon LBP5050 aiii
409. unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in AOO s default OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF 278 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Security options and warnings Adjust security related options and define warnings For hidden information in documents Options Passwords for web connections _ Persistently save passwords For web connections z l Connections Protected by a master password recommended Passwords are protected by a master password You will be asked to enter it once per session if OOo dey retrieves a password From the protected password list Master Password Macro security Adjust the security level For executing macros and specify trusted macro Macro Security developers Figure 289 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices Figure 290 Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources Security options and warnings The following options are on the Security options and warnings dialog Figure 290 Securty options and wamings Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes When saving or sending When signing W
410. up options menu selection Right click Control click Open a context menu Ctrl Control 3 Command Used with other keys F5 Shift F5 Open the Navigator F11 T Open the Styles and Formatting window Frequently asked questions How is Apache OpenOffice licensed Apache OpenOffice is distributed under the Apache License Version 2 0 http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 html May I distribute Apache OpenOffice to anyone Yes How many computers may I install it on As many as you like May I sell it Yes May I use Apache OpenOffice in my business Yes I am writing a software application May I use programming code from Apache OpenOffice in my program You may within the parameters set in the Apache 2 0 license see above Why do I need Java to run Apache OpenOffice Is it written in Java Apache OpenOffice is not written in Java it is written in the C language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend the software The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is available at no cost If you do not want to use Java you can still use nearly all of the features of Apache OpenOffice 12 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started What are all these things called The terms used in Apache OpenOffice for most parts of the user interface the parts of the program you see and use in contrast to the behind th
411. us Folder J Outook Folder C Templates Folder ecm chapter_template_V2 File type E OpenDocument Text odt OpenDocument Text Template ott 7 OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw _ Save with passwo OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 5 0 sdw StarWriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 40 Saving a file in Microsoft Word format From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the Microsoft Word document You have changed the name and file type of your document If you want to go back to working with the odt version of your document you must open it again To have Apache OpenOffice save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save See Choosing options for loading and saving documents in Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice Tip Working with text Working with text Selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is similar to working with text in any other program Apache OpenOffice also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Selecting items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 41 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Cont
412. use Page Preview 1 Choose File gt Page Preview or click the Page Preview button S on the Standard toolbar Writer now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar a k Loy RE 59 Cf Close Preview Figure 250 Page Preview toolbar Writer 2 Select the required preview icon Two Pages GG Multiple Pages 45 or Book Preview 5 Chapter 9 Printing Exporting and E mailing 241 3 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 25 to open the Print dialog 4 Choose the print options and click the Print button Calc To preview the sheets in Calc before printing 1 Choose File gt Page Preview The Calc window now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar AA Lj E c FormatPage Margis Close Preview Figure 251 Page Preview toolbar Calc 2 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 24 to open the Print dialog 3 Choose the print options and click the Print button Exporting to PDF OpenOffice org can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF Click the Export Directly as P
413. use pointer over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If you convert the icon to a floating toolbar however the title is Lines as shown in Figure 145 1 Curve filled 4 Freeform line Filled 7 Polygon 45 2 Polygon filled 5 Curve 8 Freeform line 3 Polygon 45 filled 6 Polygon Figure 145 Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines Polygons Draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a first corner point is drawn move the mouse to see how the second line will look Every mouse click sets another corner point A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygon 45 Like ordinary polygons these are formed from lines but with angles of 45 or 90 degrees between them Freeform line With this tool you can draw just like with a pencil Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click Just release the 158 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started mouse button and the drawing is completed If you have selected Freeform Line Filled the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Curves and filled curves For a descript
414. w gt Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog where you can set the same options as on the Status bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available Zoom amp View Layout Zoom factor View layout Optimal C Automatic Fit width and height Single page Fit width Columns 100 Book mode Variable Cancel Figure 37 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing Apache OpenOffice In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 38 52 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Previous 4 4 Figure 38 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 39 shows icons for all the object types shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example the results of a Find command Figure 39 Navigation toolbar Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to
415. ws to be repeated selecting one cell in each row works Edit Print Ranges Print range none Rows to repeat user defined Columns to repeat Figure 99 Specifying repeating rows Page breaks While defining a print range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually adjust Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin 2 Select Insert gt Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H i To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change their color Tip Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit gt Delete Manual Break 3 S
416. x page This process is similar to creating web pages from Impress presentations For more information see Chapter 10 Printing E mailing Exporting and Saving Slide Shows in the mpress Guide Adding comments to a drawing Draw supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc Choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the Draw page with a larger text box beside it Draw has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments l 2 3 4 3 6 7 BE g 10 Il Jean Hollis Weber Today 03 44 Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to enter the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Chapter 6 Getting Started with Draw 171 172 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting S
417. xisting custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style Create Style Style name NewStyle Figure 22 Naming a new style created from a selection 36 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new Style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Paragraph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will be added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw Impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a template or document Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File gt Templates gt Organize 2 Inthe Template Management dialog Figure 23 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Documents on the right l To copy styles from a file that is not open click the File button When you Tip return to this
418. xisting tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements The database in AOO requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have Caution it on your computer you can download it from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 5 0 or higher In AOO use Tools gt A Options gt OpenOffice org gt Java to register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used but other versions can Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other For example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for the names of the authors and another field for the names of the books There is an obvious relationship between the authors Chapter 7 Getting Started with Base 173 and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social security numbers is one to one
419. xport button 308 Taming Apache OpenOffice 3 4 Getting Started Index 3 3D objects 170 A accepting or rejecting changes 75 accessibility options 280 advantages of Apache OpenOffice 11 antialiasing screen font 273 appearance options 280 Apply Style list 34 area fill editing 166 arranging objects 162 arrow styles customizing 166 arrows 165 Asian language support 287 AutoCorrect 61 289 AutoFormat Calc 106 AutolInput 98 AutoLayout 134 automatic changes 98 automatic saving 25 AutoRecovery 25 283 AutoUpdate styles 35 B background images from Gallery 257 bitmaps 170 book preview 241 booklet printing 239 bookmarks 76 borders editing 165 brackets Math 229 bring forward 162 brochure printing 239 bulleted list 136 Bullets and Numbering dialog 138 sorting records 109 Splitting the screen 94 status bar 82 themes 107 viewing 93 callouts 161 cells in Calc formatting 102 navigating 84 selecting 88 change tracking 74 changes undo and redo 28 check for updates automatically 282 circle drawing 157 clipboard 274 closing a document 25 closing OpenOffice org 26 CMYK 152 Color Bar 152 color options 276 color palette 153 color scheme 280 columns in Calc deleting 90 freezing 93 inserting 90 selecting 88 combining objects 170 comma separated values CSV 82 84 comments Draw 171 comments adding 70 complex text layout CTL 287 components of OpenOffice org 15 conditional formatting
420. xt uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Encryption support within the Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP filter allows password protected Microsoft Word documents to be saved The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between applications Note but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xlt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95 xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Data Interchange Format dif dBase dbf SYLK slk Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl Note The Java Runtime Environment is required to use the mobile device filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS GIF JPEG MET PBM
421. xt Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Entering numbers as text A number can be entered as text to preserve a leading zero by entering an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 The data is now regarded as text by Calc and displayed exactly as entered Typically formulas will treat the entry as a zero and functions will ignore it Take care that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula If smart quotes are used for apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer Note Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a slant ora hyphen or use text such as 10 Oct 03 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Calc 97 Deactivating automatic changes Calc automatically applies many changes during data input unless you deactivate those changes You can also immediately undo any automatic changes with Ctr Z AutoCorrect changes Automatic correction of typing errors replacement of straight quotation marks by curly custom quotes and starting cell content with an uppercase capital letter are controlled by Tools gt AutoCorrect Options Go to the Custom

the PDF here. - Taming Apache OpenOffice

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents